MX910 Series

User's Guide

June 2014 www.lexmark.com

Machine type(s):
7421
Model(s):
036, 236, 436
Contents 2

Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9
Connecting the printer to an outlet........................................................................................................10
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................10
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................11
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................13
Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................14

Understanding the printer control panel....................................................15

Using the control panel...........................................................................................................................15
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights........................................................15
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................16
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................18

Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................20

Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................20
Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................20
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................20
Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................21
Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................21
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................22
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................22
Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................22
Setting up Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................23
Using MyShortcut .............................................................................................................................................23
Setting up Multi Send .......................................................................................................................................24
Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................24
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................25
Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................26

Additional printer setup.............................................................................27

Installing internal options........................................................................................................................27
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................38
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................44
Contents 3

Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................45

Networking..............................................................................................................................................46
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................50

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................51

Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................51
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................51
Loading trays...........................................................................................................................................51
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................53
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................56

Paper and specialty media guide................................................................58

Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................58
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................60
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................63

Printing......................................................................................................70
Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................70
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device...........................................................................................71
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................73
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................74
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................75

Copying......................................................................................................76
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................76
Creating a copy shortcut.........................................................................................................................77
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................78
Placing a header or footer on pages.......................................................................................................81
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed...............................................................................81
Understanding the copy options.............................................................................................................81

E-mailing....................................................................................................84
Setting up the printer to e-mail...............................................................................................................84
Creating an e-mail shortcut.....................................................................................................................85
E-mailing a document..............................................................................................................................85
Customizing e-mail settings.....................................................................................................................86
Canceling an e-mail.................................................................................................................................86
Understanding the e-mail options..........................................................................................................86
Contents 4

Faxing........................................................................................................89
Setting up the printer to fax....................................................................................................................89
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................105
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................107
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................108
Canceling a fax job.................................................................................................................................109
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................109
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................110

Scanning...................................................................................................112
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................112
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................112
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................114
Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................115

Understanding the printer menus............................................................117

Menus list..............................................................................................................................................117
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................118
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................128
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................129
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................141
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................148

Saving money and the environment.........................................................198

Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................198
Saving energy........................................................................................................................................199
Recycling................................................................................................................................................200

Securing the printer..................................................................................202

Using the security lock feature..............................................................................................................202
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................202
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................203
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................203
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................203
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................204
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................204
Contents 5

Maintaining the printer............................................................................205

Cleaning printer parts............................................................................................................................205
Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................210
Estimated number of remaining pages.................................................................................................210
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................211
Ordering a 300K maintenance kit..........................................................................................................212
Storing parts and supplies.....................................................................................................................212
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................213
Replacing the 300K maintenance kit.....................................................................................................225
Replacing the ADF scan pad..................................................................................................................235
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................237

Managing the printer...............................................................................239

Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................239
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................239
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................239
Copying printer settings to other printers.............................................................................................240
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................240
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................241

Clearing jams............................................................................................242
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................242
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................243
[x]‑page jam, clear jammed paper from multipurpose feeder. [200.xx]...............................................245
[x]‑page jam, open door C and clear all jammed paper. [2yy.xx]..........................................................245
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door C. [2yy.xx]......................................................247
[x]‑page jam, open door D and clear all jammed paper. [24y.xx].........................................................249
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door D. [24y.xx]......................................................251
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door F. [24y.xx].......................................................252
[x]‑page jam, open doors G, H, and J and clear jammed paper. Leave paper in bin. [4yy.xx]...............255
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G. Leave paper in bin. [40y.xx]..............................................258
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G and clear jammed staples. Leave paper in bin. [402.93]....261
[x]‑page jam, open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise. Leave paper in bin. [426.xx–428.xx].........264
[x]‑page jam, press latch at area E to open ADF’s top cover. [28y.xx]..................................................269
Contents 6

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................271
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................271
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................287
Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................294
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................320
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................322
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................329
Solving home screen application problems...........................................................................................333
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................333
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................334

Notices.....................................................................................................335
Product information..............................................................................................................................335
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................335
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................340

Index........................................................................................................353
Safety information 7

Safety information
Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types of
accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance, property
damage, or potential fire.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
• Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
Safety information 8

This product produces ozone during normal operation, and is equipped with a filter designed to limit ozone
concentrations to levels well below the recommended exposure limits. To avoid high ozone concentration levels during
extensive usage, install this product in a well-ventilated area and replace the ozone and exhaust filters as indicated in
the product maintenance instructions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Learning about the printer 9

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions: Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
• Connecting the printer with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer: User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media available at http://support.lexmark.com.
• Loading paper Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available at
features of your printer http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.

Click ? to view context‑sensitive information.

Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Learning about the printer 10

What are you looking for? Find it here

The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer Lexmark support Web site—
support: http://support.lexmark.com
• Documentation Note: Select your country or region, and then select
• Driver downloads your product to view the appropriate support site.
• Live chat support Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
• E‑mail support site or on the printed warranty that came with your
• Voice support printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.

Connecting the printer to an outlet

Connect the power cord to the printer and then to a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
Note: The electrical outlet may look different depending on your country or region.

Selecting a location for the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure that airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
Learning about the printer 11

• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Storage temperature -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

1 Rear 120 mm (4.80 in.)

2 Right side 400 mm (15.70 in.)
3 Front 444.5 mm (17.50 in.)
4 Left side 120 mm (4.80 in.)
5 Top 400 mm (15.70 in.)

Printer configurations
Note: Make sure to configure the printer on a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
Learning about the printer 12

Basic model

1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)

2 ADF tray
3 ADF bin
4 Control panel
5 Multipurpose feeder
6 Standard 2 x 500-sheet tray
7 Standard bin

Configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 13

Hardware option Alternative hardware option

1 Staple finisher None
Note: This is supported only in select printer models.
2 3000‑sheet tray None
3 2 x 500‑sheet tray 2500‑sheet tray
4 2500‑sheet tray 2 x 500‑sheet tray
5 Finisher None
• Staple, hole punch finisher
• Booklet finisher

When using optional trays:

• The 3000-sheet tray is supported only if another optional tray is installed.
• The staple finisher is not supported if another finisher is installed.

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner

• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer 14

Using the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided documents.

• Load an original document faceup. • Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the
arrow.
Understanding the printer control panel 15

Understanding the printer control panel

Using the control panel

Use the To
1 Display • View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Touching the control panel home screen
• Opening the scanner cover
The following actions wake the printer from Hibernate mode:
• Pressing the Sleep button until the printer wakes
• Performing a power‑on reset using the main power switch
4 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
6 Clear all / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
7 Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
8 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.

Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator

lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.
Understanding the printer control panel 16

Indicator light Printer status

Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light Printer status

Off The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode.
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern

Understanding the home screen

When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.

Touch To
1 Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary language of
the printer.
2 Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3 Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4 E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
5 FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
6 Arrows Scroll up or down.
Understanding the printer control panel 17

Touch To
7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8 Menu icon Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
9 Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
10 USB Drive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies • Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search Held Jobs Search for one or more of the following items:
• User name for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
• Profile names
• Bookmark container or print job names
• USB container or print job names for supported file types

Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
Example: path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings > Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.

Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Understanding the printer control panel 18

Feature Description
Status message bar • Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the
Example: home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can
use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and
123.123.123.123
remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the
printer.

Using the touch-screen buttons

Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Touch To
1 Arrows View a list of options.
2 Copy It Print a copy.
3 Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4 Home Go to the home screen.
5 Increase Select a higher value.
6 Decrease Select a lower value.
7 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Understanding the printer control panel 19

Other touch-screen buttons

Touch To
Accept Save a setting.

Cancel • Cancel an action or a selection.

• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.

Reset Reset values on the screen.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 20

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Notes:
• Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded applications.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
• The shortcuts that you created using MyShortcut can only be edited or deleted using the application. For more
information, see “Using MyShortcut” on page 23.

Finding the IP address of the printer

Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Finding the IP address of the computer

For Windows users
1 In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2 Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.

For Macintosh users

1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2 Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3 Look for the IP address.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server

The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Customizing the home screen

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application.

Understanding the different applications

Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
on page 23.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
89.
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
Multi Send” on page 24.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
on page 23.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on
page 84.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 114.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
to an FTP address” on page 113.
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
up Scan to Network” on page 24.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22

Activating the home screen applications

Finding information about the home screen applications

Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 20.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2 Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
• Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
• Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.

Setting up Forms and Favorites

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23

Setting up Card Copy

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.

Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24

Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or e-
mail jobs.

To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Multi Send

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
computer” on page 20.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.

Setting up Scan to Network

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25

Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do either of the following:
• Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
• Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel

This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network
printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other
print-related tasks.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26

Exporting and importing a configuration

You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Export or import a configuration file for one or multiple applications.

For one application

a Navigate to:
Settings > Apps > Apps Management > select an application > Configure
b Export or import the configuration file.
Notes:
• If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
• If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.

For multiple applications

a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Export or import a configuration file.
Note: When importing a configuration file, click Submit to complete the process.
Additional printer setup 27

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Available internal options

• Memory card
– DDR2 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Forms and Bar Code
– PRESCRIBE
– IPDS
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– Standard 10/100/1000 Ethernet
– MarkNetTM N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless print server
– MarkNet N8352 802.11 b/g/n wireless print server

Accessing the controller board

Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 28

1 Remove the connector cover.

2 Remove the screws from the controller board access cover.

3 Remove the access cover.

4 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector:

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
Additional printer setup 29

1 Option card connector

2 Memory card connector
3 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector

5 Align the base of the access cover to the printer.

Additional printer setup 30

6 Reattach the access cover.

7 Tighten the screws on the access cover.

8 Reattach the connector cover.

Installing a memory card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
Additional printer setup 31

4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.

Installing an optional card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
Additional printer setup 32

4 Push the card firmly into place.

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush with the controller board.

Installing an Internal Solutions Port

The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP). Install an ISP for additional connectivity
options.
Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 33

1 Unpack the ISP kit.

1 ISP
2 Plastic mounting bracket
3 Thumbscrews

2 Access the controller board. For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
3 Remove the printer hard disk.
Note: The hard disk must be removed before installing an ISP.
a Unplug the hard disk interface cable from the controller board.
Additional printer setup 34

b Remove the screws that secure the hard disk.

c Remove the hard disk.

4 Install the ISP in the same location where the hard disk was located on the controller board.
a Align the posts of the plastic mounting bracket with the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the
bracket on the cage until it clicks into place.
Additional printer setup 35

b Install the ISP on the bracket.

c Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the ISP to the bracket.

5 Secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board cage using the screws.

6 Remove the thumbscrews that attach the hard disk mounting bracket to the hard disk, and then remove the bracket.
Additional printer setup 36

7 Align the standoffs of the hard disk with the holes on the ISP, and then press the hard disk down until the standoffs
click into place.

8 Insert the plug of the hard disk interface cable into the connector on the ISP, and then connect the ISP solution
interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.

Removing a printer hard disk

Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
Additional printer setup 37

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 Unplug the hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the hard disk. To
unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling out
the cable.

3 Remove the screws holding the hard disk in place.

Additional printer setup 38

4 Remove the hard disk.

Installing hardware options

Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:
• Optional 2 x 500‑ or 2500‑sheet tray
• Printer
• Staple finisher
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
• Staple, hole punch finisher or booklet finisher
• Optional 3000‑sheet tray
Note: The staple finisher is not supported if another finisher is installed. For more information on installing the
finishers and optional trays, see the instruction sheet that came with the option.

Installing optional trays

Notes:
• For information on installing the optional 3000-sheet tray, see the instruction sheet that came with the option.
• Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
Additional printer setup 39

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
The optional trays come with the following accessories:
Accessory name Quantity
Stabilizing feet 2

Locking clip 3

Metal bracket 1
Additional printer setup 40

Accessory name Quantity

Screw 5

1 Turn off the printer.

2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.

4 Attach the stabilizing feet to the optional tray.

Note: Make sure the feet click into place.
Additional printer setup 41

5 Remove the connector cover from the printer.

6 Lift the printer using the handles at the sides.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Additional printer setup 42

7 Align the printer with the tray, and then lower the printer into place.

8 Remove the tape from the connectors, and then plug the connectors into the receptacles of the printer.

9 Open Tray 2 and Tray 3.

Additional printer setup 43

10 Secure the tray to the printer using the locking clips and the metal bracket.
• Back

• Front

11 Reinstall the connector cover.

12 Connect the power cord to the printer and electrical outlet.

Additional printer setup 44

13 Turn on the printer.

14 Set the printer software to recognize the optional tray. For more information, see “Adding available options in the
print driver” on page 45.

Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port

Use the To
1 EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and
the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the
printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
2 LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack
(RJ‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access
the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
Additional printer setup 45

Use the To
3 Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4 Internal Solutions Port (ISP) or Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk.
printer hard disk slot
Note: If the printer has support
for wireless connection, then the
wireless antenna is attached
here.
5 Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.
6 USB ports Attach a keyboard.
7 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the area
shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer

1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.

Adding available options in the print driver

For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b Type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
Additional printer setup 46

3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.

For Macintosh users

1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.

Networking
Notes:
• Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with the adapter.
• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network

To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
• The network gateway
• The network mask
• A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network

Notes:
• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
Additional printer setup 47

• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.

Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard

Before you begin, make sure that:
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit

Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
Additional printer setup 48

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.

3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Using the Push Button Configuration method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method
2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Additional printer setup 49

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.
4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.

Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP

Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network.

For Windows users

1 Open the printers folder.
2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3 Configure the port from the list.
4 Update the IP address.
5 Apply the changes.

For Macintosh users

1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2 Type the IP address in the address field.
Additional printer setup 50

3 Apply the changes.

Setting up serial printing (Windows only)

After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer.
Note: Serial printing reduces print speed.
1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Save the settings.
2 From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3 Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt, and then type devmgmt.msc.

Verifying printer setup

When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Loading paper and specialty media 51

Loading paper and specialty media

The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 242 and “Storing paper” on page 63.

Setting the paper size and type

From the home screen navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size setting is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the
printer menus.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Universal Setup

2 Select a unit of measure, and then set the portrait width and height.
3 Apply the changes.

Loading trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause
a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 52

2 Squeeze and slide the paper guides to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

Note: Use the indicators on the bottom of the tray to position the guides.

3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
Loading paper and specialty media 53

4 Load the paper stack with the printable side faceup.

Notes:
• Load printable side facedown for duplex printing.
• Load pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front or the left side of the tray.
• Load letterhead with the header on the left side of the tray.
• Make sure that the paper is below the maximum fill line on the edge of the paper tray. Overfilling may cause
paper jams.

5 Insert the tray.

6 From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Loading the multipurpose feeder

1 Open the multipurpose feeder.
Loading paper and specialty media 54

2 Adjust the guide to match the size of the paper you are loading.

3 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.

4 Load the paper.

• Load only one size and type of paper.

Loading letterhead
Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing

Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead
facedown with the header on the left side of the facedown with the header on the right side of the
feeder. feeder.
Loading paper and specialty media 55

Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher

Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead faceup Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead faceup
with the header on the right side of the feeder. with the header on the left side of the feeder.

Loading prepunched paper

One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

• Load envelopes with the flap side up.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
Loading paper and specialty media 56

• Make sure that the paper is below the maximum fill line. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

5 From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
feeder.

Linking and unlinking trays

The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty, paper
feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.

Linking and unlinking trays

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 51.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Loading paper and specialty media 57

Creating a custom name for a paper type

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Custom Names

2 Type a custom paper type name, and then apply the changes.
3 Touch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Touch Submit.
Paper and specialty media guide 58

Paper and specialty media guide

Notes:
• Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel.
• Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
• The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Using specialty media

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card
stock loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed
problems.
• Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.

Tips on using envelopes

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist.
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
– Have an interlocking design.
– Have postage stamps attached.
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Paper and specialty media guide 59

– Have bent corners.

– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
• Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels
loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark
Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.
• Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Tips on using letterhead

• Use letterhead specifically for laser printers.
• Print samples before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex and fan the sheets.
• When printing on letterhead, take note of the page orientation.
Source Printing Side with the Paper orientation
letterhead
Trays One‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the back
of the tray.
Two‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the front
of the tray.
Multipurpose feeder One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
top edge on the left side.
Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
top edge on the right side.
Paper and specialty media guide 60

Tips on using transparencies

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
• When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval
of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin. You can
also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.

Paper guidelines

Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:

Weight
The printer trays can feed paper weights between 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) grain long paper. The multipurpose feeder
can feed paper weights between 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might
not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–169 g/m2 (16–45‑lb) paper.

Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.

Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 200 Sheffield points.

Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick
paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Paper and specialty media guide 61

Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

• Use grain long for 60–256‑g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.
• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
• Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
• Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
• Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
• Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Paper and specialty media guide 62

• Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)

• Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
• Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
• Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)
• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or the Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.

Unacceptable paper examples

Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple part forms or documents
Paper and specialty media guide 63

For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and weights of
paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.

Paper sizes supported by the printer

Paper sizes supported by the trays and multipurpose feeder
Paper size Dimensions Standard Standard 2 x 500‑ 2500‑sheet 3000‑sheet Multipurpose Two‑sided
500‑sheet 500‑sheet sheet tray tray feeder3 printing
tray (Tray tray (Tray tray
1) 2)
A4 210 x 297 mm 2 2 2
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 148 x 210 mm 1 1 1 X X
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
A6 105 x 148 mm X X X X X 1
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm X X
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supported only in long‑edge orientation.
3 Supports paper size without size sensing.
4Supported only if the width is from 139.7 mm (5.5 in.) to 320 mm (12.6 in.), and the length is from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to
458 mm (18 in.).
Note: Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296.9 mm (11.69 in.), and the length is up
to 1219.2 mm (48 in.). Set the paper size to Universal.
Paper and specialty media guide 64

Paper size Dimensions Standard Standard 2 x 500‑ 2500‑sheet 3000‑sheet Multipurpose Two‑sided
500‑sheet 500‑sheet sheet tray tray feeder3 printing
tray (Tray tray (Tray tray
1) 2)
Letter 216 x 279 mm 2 2
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal 216 x 356 mm X X
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 184 x 267 mm X X
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
JIS B4 257 x 364 mm X X
(10.12 x 14.33 in.)
SRA3 320 x 450 mm X 1 X X X 1
(12.6 x 17.7 in.)
A3 297 x 420 mm X X
(11.69 x 16.54 in.)
12 x 18 305 x 457 mm X 1 X X X 1
(12 x 18 in.)
11 x 17 279.4 x 431.8 mm X X
(11 x 17 in.)
Oficio 216 x 340 mm X X
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio 216 x 330 mm X X
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement 140 x 216 mm 1 1 1 X X
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Universal 76.2 x 76.2 mm
(3 x 3 in.) to
X X 4
320 x 1219.2 mm
(12.6 x 48 in.)
7 3/4 98 x 191 mm X X X X X X
Envelope (3.9 x 7.5 in.)
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm X X X X X X
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm X X X X X X
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supported only in long‑edge orientation.
3 Supports paper size without size sensing.
4Supported only if the width is from 139.7 mm (5.5 in.) to 320 mm (12.6 in.), and the length is from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to
458 mm (18 in.).
Note: Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296.9 mm (11.69 in.), and the length is up
to 1219.2 mm (48 in.). Set the paper size to Universal.
Paper and specialty media guide 65

Paper size Dimensions Standard Standard 2 x 500‑ 2500‑sheet 3000‑sheet Multipurpose Two‑sided
500‑sheet 500‑sheet sheet tray tray feeder3 printing
tray (Tray tray (Tray tray
1) 2)
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm X X X X X X
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm X X X X X X
(6.4 x 9 in.)
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm X X X X X X
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
Other 98 x 162 mm X X X X X X
Envelope (3.9 x 6.3 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supported only in long‑edge orientation.
3 Supports paper size without size sensing.
4Supported only if the width is from 139.7 mm (5.5 in.) to 320 mm (12.6 in.), and the length is from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to
458 mm (18 in.).
Note: Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296.9 mm (11.69 in.), and the length is up
to 1219.2 mm (48 in.). Set the paper size to Universal.

Paper sizes supported by the ADF and scanner glass

Paper size Dimensions ADF Scanner glass
Business card X 1,2

3x5 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) X 1,2

4x6 101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in.) 2 1,2

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)

A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.) 2

A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.) 1,2 1,2

JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.)

Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)

Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.)

JIS B4 257 x 364 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in.)

SRA3 320 x 450 mm (12.6 x 17.7 in.) X X

1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supports paper size without size sensing.
Paper and specialty media guide 66

Paper size Dimensions ADF Scanner glass

A3 297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in.)

12 x 18 305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in.) X X

11 x 17 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17 in.)

Oficio 216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.) 2 2

Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)

Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Universal 89 x 98.4 mm (3.50 x 3.87 in.) to 2 2

297 x 431.8 mm (11.69 x 17.00 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.) X X
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.) X X
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.) X X
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.) X X
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 in.) X X
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in.) X X
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.3 in.) to 176 x 250 mm X X
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
Custom Scan Size [x] 2 2

1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.

2 Supports paper size without size sensing.

Paper types and weights supported by the printer

The printer engine supports 60–256‑g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type Standard Standard 2 x 500- 2500‑sheet 3000‑sheet Multipurpose ADF Scanner
500‑sheet 500‑sheet sheet tray tray tray feeder
tray (Tray 1) tray (Tray 2)
Plain Paper1

Card Stock1

Transparencies2 X X X X X

Recycled1
1 Paper is supported for two‑sided printing.
2Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see “Tips
on using transparencies” on page 60.
Paper and specialty media guide 67

Paper type Standard Standard 2 x 500- 2500‑sheet 3000‑sheet Multipurpose ADF Scanner
500‑sheet 500‑sheet sheet tray tray tray feeder
tray (Tray 1) tray (Tray 2)
Glossy1

Heavy Glossy1

Labels X X X X X

Vinyl Labels X X X X X X

Bond1

Envelope X X X X X

Rough Envelope X X X X X

Letterhead1

Preprinted1

Colored Paper1

Light Paper1

Heavy Paper1

Rough Cotton1

Custom Type1
1 Paper is supported for two‑sided printing.
2Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see “Tips
on using transparencies” on page 60.

Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the finishers

The printer engine supports 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper weights.
Note: When a finisher is installed, the standard finisher bin becomes the default bin even for print jobs that do not
require finishing.
Paper and specialty media guide 68

Supported paper sizes

Paper size Staple finisher Staple, hole punch Staple, hole punch Booklet finisher
finisher bin 1 finisher bin 2
A6 3 3 X X

A5 3 3 2 X

JIS B5 X

JIS B4

Executive X

Letter

A4

Legal 4

12 x 18 1 3 1

11 x 17

SRA3 1 3 1

A3

Oficio 1 3 3 X

Folio 1 3 3 X

Statement 1 3 3 X

Universal 3 1 5

1 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks or staples the paper but does not punch holes in it.
3 Paper is supported but the finisher does not stack, staple, or punch holes in it.
4 Paper is supported only for 2‑hole punch.
5 Paper is supported only if the paper size is between 210 x 279.4 mm (8.27 x 11 in.) and 320 x 457.2 mm (12.6 x 18 in.).

Supported paper types

Paper type Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher Booklet finisher
Plain Paper 5

1Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 60.
2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple it.
3 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
4 Paper is supported only if the finisher punches holes or stacks the paper but does not staple it.
5 Paper is supported only if the finisher staples or folds the paper.
Paper and specialty media guide 69

Paper type Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher Booklet finisher
Card Stock 2 X

Transparency1 2 3 X

Recycled 2 5

Glossy 2 5

Heavy Glossy 2 4 X

Labels 2 3 X

Bond 5

Envelope 2 3 X

Rough Envelope 2 3 X

Letterhead 5

Preprinted 5

Colored Paper 5

Light Paper 5

Heavy Paper 2 4 X

Rough Cotton 2 X

Custom Type 5

1Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 60.
2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple it.
3 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
4 Paper is supported only if the finisher punches holes or stacks the paper but does not staple it.
5 Paper is supported only if the finisher staples or folds the paper.
Printing 70

Printing

Printing forms and a document

Printing forms
Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed.
Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and
Favorites” on page 22.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2 Apply the changes.

Printing a document
1 From the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:

For Windows users

a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users

a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options pop‑up menus, adjust the settings, if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing 71

Adjusting toner darkness

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu

2 Adjust the toner darkness setting, and then save the changes.

Printing from a flash drive or mobile device

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you are prompted to type the file password from the control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively
printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Printing 72

2 From the control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Specify the number of copies to be printed, and then send the job for printing.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.

Supported flash drives and file types

Notes:
• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Recommended flash drives File type

• Lexar FireFly (512MB and 1GB) Documents:

• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB) • .pdf
• Sony (512MB and 1GB) • .xps
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .jpeg or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .tiff or .tif
• .png

Printing from a mobile device

To download a compatible mobile printing application, visit www.lexmark.com/mobile.
Printing 73

Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to
examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2 Touch Submit.

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Notes:
• Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
• Confidential print jobs require a four‑digit PIN.

For Windows users

1 With a document open, select File > Print.
2 Open the printer properties, and then select Print and Hold.
Printing 74

3 Select the print job type, and then assign a user name.
4 Send the print job to the printer.
5 From the printer home screen, open the Held Jobs folder and then release the job.

For Macintosh users

1 With a document open, select File > Print.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, select Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type, and then assign a user name.
4 Send the print job to the printer.
5 From the printer home screen, open the Held Jobs folder and then release the job.

Modifying confidential print settings

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Save the modified settings.

Printing information pages

For more information on printing information pages, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 50 and “Printing a
network setup page” on page 50.

Printing a font sample list

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing 75

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b Type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.

For Macintosh users

1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, open the printers folder.
2 Open the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Copying 76

Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents. • Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
• Load the original document faceup. small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.

Making copies

Copying using the ADF or scanner glass

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

Note: To make a quick copy, from the control panel, press .

Copying photos
1 Place a photo on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content > Photo >

3 From the Content Source menu, select the setting that best matches the original photo.

4 Touch > Copy It.

Copying 77

Copying on transparencies or letterhead

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
3 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains the specialty media.
If you are loading the specialty media into the multipurpose feeder, then navigate to:

Multipurpose Feeder > > select the size of the specialty media > > Transparency or Letterhead

4 Touch > Copy It.

Creating a copy shortcut

Notes:

• Make sure that Copy Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General
Settings > Home screen customization > Copy Shortcuts > Display > Submit.

• To delete a copy shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > Copy Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete > Delete
now.

Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Copy.
2 Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Copying 78

Customizing copy settings

Copying to a different size

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
3 Touch Copy to, and then select a new size for the copy.

4 Touch > Copy It.

Making copies using paper from a selected tray

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
3 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray containing the paper type you want to use.

4 Touch > Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes

Copying onto mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

3 Touch Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It.

Copying onto a single paper size

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

3 Touch Copy to > Letter > > Copy It.

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying 79

Copying on both sides of the paper (two‑sided)

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred two‑sided method
Note: For the preferred method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second
number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided original
documents and you want two‑sided copies.

3 Touch > Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy.

3 From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to
fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
4 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content > specify the content type of the document >

3 Specify the content source of the document, and then touch > Copy It.

Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
Copying 80

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets > select where you want to place the separator sheets
Note: Set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3) to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2),
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
page 79.

3 Touch > Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.

Notes:
• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.

Creating a custom copy job

The custom copy job is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > > Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
Copying 81

3 Load the next document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan from automatic feeder or
Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
4 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

Placing a header or footer on pages

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type
of header or footer you want
3 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.

4 Touch , and then press .

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed

1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Understanding the copy options

Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.

Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the paper size setting for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the
Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
Copying 82

Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.
• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Punch
This setting specifies whether copy jobs will have holes punched in them.

Staple
This setting specifies whether copy jobs that contain multiple pages will be stapled.
Copying 83

Using the advanced options

• Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, one-sided or two-sided printing, and type of binding.
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you copy the
document.
• Create Booklet—This creates a one‑sided or two‑sided booklet.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
• Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase removes whatever is within the area
selected.
• Fold—This folds the paper in two (bifold) or three (trifold).
Note: This option appears only if a booklet finisher is installed.
• Header/Footer—This inserts Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text in the specified header or
footer location.

• Margin Shift—This increases or decreases the page margin by shifting the scanned image. Touch or to
set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy is cropped.
• Offset Pages—This offsets pages between copies or between jobs.
• Overlay—This creates a watermark or message that overlays each page of your copy. You can choose from preset
messages or enter a custom message.
• Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called
N-up printing, where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages on a single page,
and 4-up would print four pages on a single page.
• Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
E-mailing 84

E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents. • Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
• Load the original document faceup. small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.

Setting up the printer to e-mail

Configuring e‑mail settings

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing 85

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Notes:

• Make sure that E-mail Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General
Settings > Home screen customization > E-mail Shortcuts > Display > Submit.

• To delete an e-mail shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > E‑mail Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete >
Delete Entry > Delete now.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses,
then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
MyShortcut > Create > E‑mail
2 Type a unique shortcut name, and then touch Done.
3 Configure the e‑mail settings, and then touch Done.
4 Touch E‑mail Shortcuts on the home screen to verify the shortcut.

E-mailing a document

Sending an e-mail using the control panel

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch E-mail, and then enter the information needed.
3 Configure and then save the output file type settings.
4 Touch Send It.
E-mailing 86

Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
3 Touch Send It.

Sending an e‑mail using the address book

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
3 Select the recipient’s name, and then touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings

Changing the output file type

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
3 Select the file type you want to send.
Note: If you select Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

4 Touch > Send It.

Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

Understanding the e-mail options

Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.

Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
E-mailing 87

Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
E-mailing 88

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
e‑mail the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
Faxing 89

Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents. • Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
• Load the original document faceup. small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.

Setting up the printer to fax

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.

Notes:
• The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
• During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later,
and then touch Continue.
• The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing 90

Initial fax setup

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on
page 342.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup

When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Faxing 91

Choosing a fax connection

Scenario 1: Standard telephone line

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.
Faxing 92

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer.
Faxing 93

Connected to different wall jacks

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.
Faxing 94

• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.
Faxing 95

Tips for this setup:

• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.
• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

Faxing 96

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
Note: Contact your DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter.
To install a filter for the printer:
1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other
end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
3 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer, and then
connect the telephone to the port.

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

Faxing 97

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer
into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct
splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Faxing 98

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider

Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.

Notes:
• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Faxing 99

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.
Faxing 100

If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.

Part name Part number

Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Faxing 101

Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.

Notes:
• The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
the port of the printer.
• In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.
Faxing 102

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany

The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.

N F N
Faxing 103

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded
telephone system.
Faxing 104

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.

Setting the outgoing fax name and number

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 105

Notes:
• View the IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
Note: The use of network time is recommended.
4 Click Submit.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time

The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Click the Automatically Observe DST check box.
4 In the Custom Time Zone Setup section, set the DST start and end dates.
5 Click Submit.

Sending a fax

Sending a fax using the control panel

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• You can also enter the recipient using the shortcut number or address book.
• To add recipients, touch Next number.
3 Touch Fax It.
Faxing 106

Sending a fax using the computer

For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers.
4 If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5 Apply the changes, and then send the fax job.

Notes:
• The fax option is available only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For more information, go
to http://support.lexmark.com.
• To use the fax option with the PostScript driver, configure and enable it in the Configuration tab.

For Macintosh users

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select the printer.
3 Enter the recipient fax number, and then configure other fax settings, if necessary.
4 Send the fax job.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.

4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Faxing 107

Creating shortcuts
Notes:

• Make sure that Fax Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General Settings >
Home screen customization > Fax Shortcuts > Display > Submit.

• To delete a fax shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete > Delete now.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

2 Touch .
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Faxing 108

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.

Viewing a fax log

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 109

Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.

Canceling a fax job

1 From the control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Holding and forwarding faxes

Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
Faxing 110

c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.

Understanding the fax options

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Faxing 111

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the
document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scanning 112

Scanning

Using Scan to Network

Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 24.

Scanning to an FTP address

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents. • Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
• Load the original document faceup. small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.

Creating shortcuts
Notes:

• Make sure that FTP Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General
Settings > Home screen customization > FTP Shortcuts > Display > Submit.

• To delete an FTP shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete > Delete
now.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Scanning 113

Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > > type a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using the control panel

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It

Notes:
• You can also enter the recipient using the shortcut number or address book.
• To add recipients, touch Next Number.
Scanning 114

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents. • Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
• Load the original document faceup. small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.

Setting up Scan to Computer

Notes:
• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.
2 Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.
3 From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It.

Scanning to a flash drive

1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 Insert the flash drive into the USB port.
3 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
4 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Scanning 115

Understanding the scan options

FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Scanning 116

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
Understanding the printer menus 117

Understanding the printer menus

Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security
Default Source Menu Settings Page Active NIC Edit Security Setups
Paper Size/Type Device Statistics Standard Network1 Miscellaneous Security Settings
Configure MP Stapler Test Standard USB Confidential Print
Substitute Size Network Setup Page Parallel [x] Erase Temporary Data Files
Paper Texture Network [x] Setup Page Serial [x] Security Audit Log
Paper Loading Shortcut List SMTP Setup Set Date and Time
Custom Types Fax Job Log
Custom Names Fax Call Log
Custom Scan Sizes Copy Shortcuts
Custom Bin Names E-mail Shortcuts
Universal Setup Fax Shortcuts
Bin Setup FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report
Event Log Summary

Settings Help Manage Shortcuts Option Card Menu2

General Settings Print All Guides Fax Shortcuts A list of installed DLEs (Download
Copy Settings Copy Guide E-mail Shortcuts Emulators) appears.
Fax Settings E-mail Guide FTP Shortcuts
E‑mail Settings Fax Guide Copy Shortcuts
FTP Settings FTP Guide Profile Shortcuts
Flash Drive Menu Print Defects Guide
Print Settings Information Guide
Supplies Guide

1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 118

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Use To
Default Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Tray [x] Notes:
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper • Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope • From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Paper Size/Type menu

Use To
Tray [x] Size Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
A4 Notes:
A5
A6 • Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
JIS‑B5
JIS‑B4 • If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
Letter
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the
Legal print job continues using the linked tray.
12 x 18
11 x 17
SRA3
A3
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 119

Use To
Tray [x] Type Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Plain Paper Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency • Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
Recycled
Glossy • If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom Type [x].
Heavy Glossy • Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
MP Feeder Size Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
A4 Notes:
A5
A6 • Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
JIS‑B5
JIS‑B4 • From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu.
Letter
Legal
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.
12 x 18
11 x 17
SRA3
A3
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 120

Use To
MP Feeder Type Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Plain Paper Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency • Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Recycled • From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder Type
Glossy to appear as a menu.
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Paper Size Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
A4 Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
A5 default setting.
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
JIS B4
A3
11 x 17
Folio
Statement
Universal
SRA3
12 x 18
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 121

Use To
Manual Paper Type Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Plain Paper Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency • Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Recycled • From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper
Labels Type to appear as a menu.
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Envelope Size Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
7 3/4 Envelope Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
9 Envelope international factory default setting.
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Manual Envelope Type Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Envelope Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Cassette Notes:
Manual
First • Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Understanding the printer menus 122

Substitute Size menu

Use To
Substitute Size Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Off Notes:
Statement/A5
Letter/A4 • All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
11 x 17/A3
All Listed • Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Use To
Plain Texture Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Card Stock Texture Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Smooth Notes:
Normal
Rough • Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Recycled Texture Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Labels Texture Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Bond Texture Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Understanding the printer menus 123

Use To
Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.
Rough
Letterhead Texture Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Preprinted Texture Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Colored Texture Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Light Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Heavy Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Rough/Cotton Texture Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Rough
Custom [x] Texture Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Smooth Notes:
Normal
Rough • Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Use To
Card Stock Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock
Duplex as the paper type.
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 124

Use To
Recycled Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled
Duplex as the paper type.
Off
Glossy Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Glossy as
Duplex the paper type.
Off
Heavy Glossy Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy
Duplex Glossy as the paper type.
Off
Labels Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as
Duplex the paper type.
Off
Bond Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as
Duplex the paper type.
Off
Letterhead Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead
Duplex as the paper type.
Off
Preprinted Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted
Duplex as the paper type.
Off
Colored Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Colored
Duplex as the paper type.
Off
Light Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light as
Duplex the paper type.
Off
Heavy Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as
Duplex the paper type.
Off
Rough/Cotton Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or
Duplex Cotton as the paper type.
Off
Custom [x] Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Custom [x]
Duplex as the paper type.
Off Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 125

Custom Types menu

Use To
Custom Type [x] Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type
Paper name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server
Card Stock or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Transparency Notes:
Rough/Cotton
• Paper is the factory default setting.
Labels
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
Envelope
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Paper Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency • Paper is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton • The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
Labels multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Envelope

Custom Names menu

Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.

Custom Scan Sizes menu

Use To
Custom Scan Size [x] Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan size
Scan Size Name name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Width
1–11.69 inches (25–297 mm)
Height
1–17 inches (22–432 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On

Custom Bin Names menu

Use To
Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin.
Understanding the printer menus 126

Use To
Bin [x] Specify a custom name for Bin [x].

Universal Setup menu

Use To
Units of Measure Identify the units of measure.
Inches Notes:
Millimeters
• Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width Set the portrait width.
3.54–48 inches Notes:
89.9–1219 mm
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
• 12 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 305 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height Set the portrait height.
5.5–48 inches Notes:
139.7–1219 mm
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
• 17 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 432 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Short Edge Notes:
Long Edge
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.

Bin Setup menu

Use To
Output Bin Specify the default bin.
Standard Bin Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Bin [x]*
* [x] can be any number from 1 to 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed. If multiple bins are assigned the same
name, then the name appears only once in the bin list.
Understanding the printer menus 127

Use To
Configure Bins Specify configuration options for bins.
Mailbox Notes:
Link
Link Optional • Mailbox is the factory default setting. This treats each
bin as a separate mailbox.
Type Assignment
• Link configures all available bins as one large bin.
• Link Optional links together all available bins except
the standard bin and only appears when at least two
optional bins are installed.
• Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a bin or
linked bin set.
Overflow Bin Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full.
Standard Bin Notes:
Bin [x]*
• This menu appears only when optional bins are
installed.
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Assign Type/Bin Select a bin for each supported paper type.
Plain Paper Bin For each type, select from the following options:
Card Stock Bin Disabled
Transparency Bin Standard Bin
Recycled Bin Bin [x]*
Glossy Bin Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy Bin
Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Paper Bin
Heavy Paper Bin
Rough/Cotton Bin
Custom [x] Bin
* [x] can be any number from 1 to 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed. If multiple bins are assigned the same
name, then the name appears only once in the bin list.
Understanding the printer menus 128

Reports menu

Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number
of printed pages.
Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is
installed.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected
to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log in the Fax Settings
menu is set to On.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log in the Fax Settings
menu is set to On.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 129

Use To
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure that the flash memory or hard disk is working and installed
correctly.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name.

Network/Ports menu

Active NIC menu

Use To
Active NIC Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Auto Notes:
[list of available network cards]
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use To
Energy Efficient Ethernet Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the Ethernet
Enable network.
Disable Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
On it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
On regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
Understanding the printer menus 130

Use To
NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
Off communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Auto Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Network Buffer Set the size of the network input buffer.
Auto Notes:
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
Off appears when a formatted disk is installed.
On Notes:
Auto
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Off
Auto
Standard Network Setup OR Show and set the printer network settings.
Network [x] Setup Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
Reports network.
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk

Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Understanding the printer menus 131

Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

Network Card menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
Connected
Disconnected
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address View the network addresses.
UAA
LAA
Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
0, 10–225 seconds Notes:
• “90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On

TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Understanding the printer menus 132

Use To
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Enable RARP Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Enable BOOTP Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Enable AutoIP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Enable FTP/TFTP Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Yes Protocol.
No Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
No Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS View or change the current DDNS setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Enable mDNS View or change the current mDNS setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No

IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Understanding the printer menus 133

Use To
Enable IPv6 Enable IPv6 in the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Auto Configuration Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
On address configuration entries provided by a router.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
View Address Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6 Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off

Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless
network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Start Push Button Method Notes:
Start PIN Method
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
Enable WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Disable Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode Specify the network mode.
BSS Type Notes:
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer
and a computer.
Compatibility Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
802.11b/g Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
802.11b/g/n
Understanding the printer menus 134

Use To
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.

AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Yes Note: No is the factory default setting.
No
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network] Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Standard USB menu

Use To
PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
On through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
On through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding the printer menus 135

Use To
NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buffer Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Disabled Notes:
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed] • Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Off Notes:
On
Auto • Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On Notes:
Off
Auto • Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Understanding the printer menus 136

Use To
ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

Parallel [x] menu

Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
On through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
On through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Disabled Notes:
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed] • Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 137

Use To
Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Off Notes:
On
Auto • Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
On Notes:
Off
• On is the factory default setting.
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Protocol Specify the parallel port protocol.
Standard Notes:
Fastbytes
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
On computer.
Off Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2 Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
On strobe.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On Notes:
Off
Auto • Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Understanding the printer menus 138

Use To
ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

Serial [x] menu

Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
On through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
On through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 139

Use To
Serial Buffer Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Disabled Notes:
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed] • Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Off Notes:
On
Auto • Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
DTR Notes:
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF • DTR is the factory default setting.
XON/XOFF/DTR • DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
XONXOFF/DTRDSR • XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Understanding the printer menus 140

Use To
Baud Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
1200 Notes:
2400
4800 • 9600 is the factory default setting.
9600 • 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
19200 Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Data Bits Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
7 Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
8
Parity Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Even Note: None is the factory default setting.
Odd
None
Ignore
Honor DSR Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.

SMTP Setup menu

Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Secondary SMTP Gateway

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
5–30 send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Understanding the printer menus 141

Use To
Use SSL Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
Disabled SMTP server.
Negotiate Notes:
Required
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication Specify the type of user authentication required for scan‑to e‑mail
No authentication required privileges.
Login/Plain Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
None server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Use Device SMTP Credentials Notes:
User‑Initiated E‑mail* • None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
None User‑Initiated E‑mail.
Use Device SMTP Credentials • Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
Use Session User ID & Password server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Security menu

Edit Security Setups menu

Use To
Edit Backup Password Create a backup password.
Use Backup Password Notes:
Off
On • Off is the factory default setting for Use Backup Password.
Password • This menu item appears only if a backup password exists.
Understanding the printer menus 142

Use To
Edit Building Blocks Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Internal Accounts Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template.
[list of available templates]
Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
Administrative Menus points.
Function Access
Apps Configuration
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu

Use To
Login Restrictions Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
Login failures panel before all users are locked out.
Failure time frame Notes:
Lockout time
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
Panel Login Timeout
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the factory
Remote Login Timeout default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a lockout
time.
• Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home
screen before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 900
seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 120
minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 143

Use To
Security Reset Jumper Adjust the security settings.
No Effect Notes:
Access controls=“No Security”
Reset factory security defaults • No Effect means the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration.
• Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the user
has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous
Security menu.
LDAP Certificate Verification Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Demand Notes:
Try
Allow • “Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is
requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, then
Never
the session is terminated immediately.
• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
1–16 Note: 4 is the factory default setting.

Confidential Print menu

Use To
Max Invalid PIN Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Off Notes:
2–10
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Off Notes:
1 hour
4 hours • If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those
24 hours
print jobs does not change to the new default value.
1 week
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are
deleted.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 144

Use To
Repeat Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Verify Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Reserve Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Erase Temporary Data Files menu

Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Auto
Automatic Method Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
Single pass system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Multiple pass Notes:
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without
having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.
• Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.
Understanding the printer menus 145

Security Audit Log menu

Use To
Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log.
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive to the
printer.
• To export the log from the Embedded Web Server, download the log to a
computer.
Delete Log Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Yes
No
Configure Log Specify how audit logs are configured.
Enable Audit Notes:
Yes
No • Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
Enable Remote Syslog
No • Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
Yes
Remote Syslog Server
• Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server.
[256 character string]
• Remote Syslog Port identifies the port over which the printer transmits logged
Remote Syslog Port
events to a remote server.
1–65535
• Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to transmit
Remote Syslog Method
logged events to a remote server. Normal UDP is the factory default setting.
Normal UDP
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses when
Stunnel
sending events to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
Remote Syslog Facility
• “Log full behavior” determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely fills
0–23
its allotted memory. “Wrap over oldest entries” is the factory default setting.
Log full behavior
Wrap over oldest entries
E‑mail log then delete all
entries
Understanding the printer menus 146

Use To
Configure Log (continued) Specify how audit logs are configured.
Admin’s e-mail address Notes:
[256 character string]
Digitally sign exports • “Admin’s e‑mail address” determines if administrators are automatically
notified of certain log events. This setting can have one or more e‑mail
Off
addresses (separated by commas).
On
• “Digitally sign exports” determines if the printer automatically signs each
Severity of events to log
exported security log. Off is the factory default setting.
0–7
• “Severity of events to log” records the severity value of each event. 4 is the
Remote Syslog non-logged events factory default setting.
No
• “Remote Syslog non-logged events” determines if the printer sends events to
Yes the remote server that have a severity level greater than the value of the
E-mail log cleared alert “Severity of events to log” setting. No is the factory default setting.
No • “E-mail log cleared alert” determines if the printer sends an e‑mail to the
Yes administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer control panel or
E-mail log wrapped alert EWS. No is the factory default setting.
No • “E-mail log wrapped alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator
Yes an e‑mail when log entries are wrapping. No is the factory default setting.
E-mail % full alert • “E-mail % full alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an
No e‑mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space. No is the
Yes factory default setting.
% full alert level • “% full alert level” determines if the space occupied by log equals or exceeds
1–99 the value of the full alert level. 90 is the factory default setting.
E-mail log exported alert • “E-mail log exported alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator
No an e‑mail when there is a log exported. No is the factory default setting.
Yes • “E-mail log settings changed alert” determines if the printer sends the
E-mail log settings changed alert administrator an e‑mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log setting is
toggled. No is the factory default setting.
No
Yes • “Log line endings” specifies how line endings will be handled in the log file,
depending on the operating system in which the file will be parsed or viewed.
Log line endings
“LF (\n)” is the factory default setting.
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)

Set Date and Time menu

Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the scanner.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 147

Use To
Automatically Observe DST Set the scanner to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
On associated with the scanner Time Zone setting.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup Enable the user to set up the time zone.
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enable NTP Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
On network.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Enable Authentication Enable the authentication setting.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Understanding the printer menus 148

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Use To
Display Language Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
English Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
Francais need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Eco-Mode Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Off Notes:
Energy
Energy/Paper • Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
Paper
• Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and paper
specialty media.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.
Enabled Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Disabled
Understanding the printer menus 149

Use To
Quiet Mode Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.
• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.
• Selecting Photo from the print driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup Set the printer to run the setup wizard.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting. After completing the
No setup wizard, the default becomes No.
Keyboard Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
Keyboard Type keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
English symbols from the keyboard.
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Understanding the printer menus 150

Use To
Paper Sizes Specify the default paper measurement.
US Notes:
Metric
• US is the factory default setting.
• The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
• Changing this setting also changes the default setting for
each input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
[port range] firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Displayed Information Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
Left side home screen.
Right side For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following
Custom Text [x] options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Understanding the printer menus 151

Use To
Displayed Information (continued) Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Black Toner Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.
Displayed Information (continued) Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper
Waste Toner Bottle Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors.
Paper Jam Select from the following options:
Load Paper Display
Service Errors Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.
Understanding the printer menus 152

Use To
Home screen customization Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
Change Language For each icon, select from the following options:
Copy Display
Copy Shortcuts Do Not display
Fax Notes:
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail • Display is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax, E‑mail,
FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held Jobs, USB Drive, Forms and
E‑mail Shortcuts
Favorites, Card Copy, Scan to Network, MyShortcut, and
FTP Multisend.
FTP Shortcuts
• Do not display is the factory default setting for Change
Search Held Jobs Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, E‑mail Shortcuts,
Held Jobs FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Apps, Bookmarks, and Jobs by
USB Drive user.
Profiles and Apps
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Card Copy
Scan to Network
MyShortcut
Multi Send
Date Format Format the printer date.
MM‑DD‑YYYY Notes:
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD • MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
• DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format Format the printer time.
12 hour A.M./P.M. Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
24 hour clock
Screen Brightness Specify the brightness of the control panel screen.
20–100 Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Output Lighting Set the amount of light from the standard bin.
Normal/Standby Mode Notes:
Off
Dim • Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy
or Energy/Paper.
Bright
• Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to
Paper or Off.
Understanding the printer menus 153

Use To
Audio Feedback Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Button Feedback Notes:
On
Off • On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
Volume • 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
1–10
Show Bookmarks Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Allow Background Removal Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
On e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image is removed.
Allow Custom Job Scans Scan multiple jobs to one file.
On Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Off Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
Job level in the ADF.
Page level Notes:
• Job level is the factory default setting. If selected, then the
entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
30–300 refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
Alarm Control For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Cartridge Alarm Off
Staple Alarm Single
Hole Punch Alarm Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.
• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm, Staple
Alarm, and Hole Punch Alarm.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Understanding the printer menus 154

Use To
Timeouts Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
Standby Mode enters a lower power state.
Disabled Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
1–240
Timeouts Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is
Sleep Mode printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Disabled Notes:
1–120
• 20 is the factory default setting.
• Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts Allow the printer to print even when the display is off.
Print with Display off Note: Allow printing with display off is the factory default setting.
Allow printing with display off
Display on when printing
Timeouts Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Hibernate Timeout Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Disabled
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Timeouts Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active
Hibernate Timeout on Connection Ethernet connection.
Do Not Hibernate Note: Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Hibernate
Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
Screen Timeout returning to Ready state.
15–300 Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to the
Prolong Screen Timeout home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Understanding the printer menus 155

Use To
Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
Print Timeout end‑of‑job message before canceling the rest of the print job.
Disabled Notes:
1–255
• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job.
Disabled Notes:
15–65535
• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This has no effect on PCL emulation
print jobs.
Timeouts Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
Job Hold Timeout before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
5–255 continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a formatted printer hard disk
is installed.
Error Recovery Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered.
Auto Reboot Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Error Recovery Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
Max Auto Reboots perform.
1–20 Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
Auto Continue situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Disabled Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
5–255
Understanding the printer menus 156

Use To
Print Recovery Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Jam Recovery Notes:
On
Off • Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
Auto
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.
Jam Assist Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off
Print Recovery Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
Page Protect otherwise.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
Do Nothing button while the printer is idle.
Sleep Notes:
Hibernate
• Sleep is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber. Touch anywhere on the
display or press a button on the control panel to wake the
printer from Sleep mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the display is
completely off and the Sleep button turns amber and is
blinking.
Press and Hold Sleep Button Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
Do Nothing button for 3 seconds or longer while the printer is idle.
Sleep Notes:
Hibernate
• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber. Touch anywhere on the
display or press a button on the control panel to wake the
printer from Sleep mode.
Understanding the printer menus 157

Use To
Factory Defaults Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Do Not Restore Notes:
Restore Now
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in
flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
Export Configuration Package Export the printer configuration file to a flash drive.
Export

Copy Settings menu

Use To
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Sides (Duplex) Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then to specify
1 sided to 1 sided whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
1 sided to 2 sided Notes:
2 sided to 1 sided
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
2 sided to 2 sided
will also have print on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Understanding the printer menus 158

Use To
Paper Saver Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Print Page Borders Specify whether a border is printed.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Collate Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2) Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Punch Specify the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job.
Off Notes:
2 holes
3 holes • Off is the factory default setting.
4 holes • This menu item appears only when a staple, hole punch finisher is installed.
Staple Enable or disable the staple finisher.
Off Notes:
1 staple
2 staples • Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 159

Use To
Original Size Specify the paper size of the original document.
Letter Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
Legal setting.
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Copy To Source Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Auto Size Match
Multipurpose Feeder
Transparency Separators Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
On Notes:
Off
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to On, a blank page is placed between transparencies.
Separator Sheets Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Darkness Lighten or darken the print for the copy job.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 160

Use To
Output Bin Specify the bin to be used for the copy job.
Standard Bin Notes:
Bin [x]
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Number of Copies Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
1–9999 Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.
[Location] For the location, select from the following options:
Off • Top left
Date/Time • Top middle
Page number
• Top right
Custom text
• Bottom left
Print on
All pages
• Bottom middle
First page only • Bottom right
All but first page Notes:
Custom text
• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• All pages is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Confidential Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Custom Job scanning Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 161

Use To
Auto Center Automatically center the content on the page.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each
Color Dropout color threshold.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
0–5 Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy Create a sample copy of the original document.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 162

Fax Settings menu

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu

Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

General Fax Settings

Use To
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID Specify how the fax is identified.
Fax Name Note: Fax Number is the factory default setting.
Fax Number
Enable Manual Fax Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
On Notes:
Off
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
• Off is the factory default setting.
Memory Use Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
All receive Notes:
Mostly receive
Equal • Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
Mostly send
All send • Mostly send specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes Specify whether the printer cancels fax jobs.
Allow Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Don't Allow
Caller ID Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Off
Primary
Alternate
Fax number masking Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Off Notes:
From left
From right • The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask setting.
• Off is the factory default setting.
Digits to Mask Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
0–58 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 163

Use To
Fax Cover Page Configure the fax cover page.
Fax Cover Page Notes:
Off by default
On by default • Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
Never use • Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]

Fax Send Settings

Use To
Resolution Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
Standard increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Fine 200 dpi Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Understanding the printer menus 164

Use To
Original Size Specify the size of the original document.
Letter Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
Legal default setting.
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Off Notes:
Long edge
Short edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Understanding the printer menus 165

Use To
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Prefix Rule [x]
Automatic Redial Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
0–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency Specify the number of minutes between redials.
1–200 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Yes Note: No is the factory default setting.
No
Enable ECM Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Enable Fax Scans Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Driver to fax Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Allow Save as Shortcut Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Dial Mode Specify a dialing sound.
Tone Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Pulse
Max Speed Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
2400 Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
4800
9600
14400
33600
Custom Job scanning Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 166

Use To
Scan Preview Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each
Color Dropout color threshold.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
0–5 Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 167

Use To
Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
‑4 to 4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Scans Enable color faxing.
Off by default Note: Off by default is the factory default setting.
On by default
Never use
Always use
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Faxes Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off

Fax Receive Settings

Use To
Enable Fax Receive Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Fax Job Waiting Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
None resources.
Toner Note: None is the factory default setting.
Toner and Supplies
Rings to Answer Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
1–25 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Answer Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Manual Answer Code Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
0–9 Notes:
• *9* is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
On fax source.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Sides (Duplex) Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Understanding the printer menus 168

Use To
Separator Sheets Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Before Job
After Job
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Output Bin Specify a bin for received faxes.
Standard Bin Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Bin [x]
Fax Footer Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Max Speed Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
2400 Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
4800
9600
14400
33600
Fax Forwarding Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Print Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Print and Forward
Forward
Forward to Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Fax Notes:
E‑mail
FTP • Fax is the factory default setting.
LDSS • This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
eSF
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Block No Name Fax Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID
Off specified.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding Faxes Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.
Held Fax Mode Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Understanding the printer menus 169

Use To
Punch Specify whether prints are punched.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple, hole punch finisher is installed.
Staple Specify whether prints are stapled.
Off Notes:
1 staple
2 staples • Off is the factory default setting.
4 staples • This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Enable Color Fax Receive Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off

Fax Log Settings

Use To
Transmission Log Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Print log Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Receive Error Log Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Print Never Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Print on Error
Auto Print Logs Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
On Notes:
Off
• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Logs Display Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax
Remote Station Name name returned.
Dialed Number Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log Enable access to the Fax Job log.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Enable Call Log Enable access to the Fax Call log.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Understanding the printer menus 170

Use To
Log Output Bin Specify the bin for the printed fax logs.
Standard Bin Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Bin [x]

Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode Specify the mode of the speaker.
Always Off Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
On until Connected fax connection is made.
Always On
Speaker Volume Control the volume setting.
High Note: High is the factory default setting.
Low
Ringer Volume Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
On

Answer On
Use To
All Rings Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Single Ring Only Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only

E‑mail Settings menu

Use To
E‑mail Server Setup Specify e‑mail server information.
Subject
Message
File Name
Send me a copy
Max e‑mail size
Size Error Message
Limit destinations
Web Link Setup
Understanding the printer menus 171

Use To
Format Specify the format of the scanned file.
PDF (.pdf) Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version Set the version of the PDF file that is scanned for e‑mailing.
1.2–1.7 Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and
Off white.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
75 dpi Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Understanding the printer menus 172

Use To
Original Size Specify the size of the document being scanned.
Letter Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
Legal default setting.
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Off Notes:
Long edge
Short edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Best for content Notes:
5–90
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
5–90 image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 173

Use To
E‑mail images sent as Specify how the images are sent.
Attachment Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Web Link
Use Multi‑Page Tiff Choose between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a multiple-
On page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or
Off multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Print log Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Log Output Bin Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Standard Bin Notes:
Bin [x]
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
E‑mail Bit Depth Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
1 bit Color is set to Off.
8 bit Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
On Notes:
Off
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Understanding the printer menus 174

Use To
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for
Color Dropout each color threshold.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast Specify the contrast of the output.
0–5 Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
‑4 to 4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc: Enable the use of the “cc:” and “bcc:” fields.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Understanding the printer menus 175

FTP Settings menu

Use To
Format Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
PDF (.pdf) Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
1.2–1.7 Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and
Off white.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
75 dpi Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Understanding the printer menus 176

Use To
Original Size Specify the size of the original document.
Letter Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
Legal default setting.
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Off Notes:
Long edge
Short edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
Best for content image.
5–90 Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
5–90 image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177

Use To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
On multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
Off or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Print log Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Log Output Bin Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Standard Bin Notes:
Bin [x]
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when an optional bin is installed.
FTP bit Depth Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
1 bit Color is set to Off.
8 bit Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Enter a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 178

Use To
Color Balance Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for
Color Dropout each color threshold.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast Specify the contrast of the output.
0–5 Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
‑4 to 4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 179

Flash Drive menu

Scan Settings
Use To
Format Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
PDF (.pdf) Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
1.2–1.7 Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and
On white.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
75 dpi Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Understanding the printer menus 180

Use To
Original Size Specify the size of the original document.
Letter Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
Legal default setting.
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Off Notes:
Long edge
Short edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Best for content Notes:
5–90
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90 Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 181

Use To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
On multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
Off or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
1 bit Color is set to Off.
8 bit Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Enter a base file name.
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job Scanning Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each
Color Dropout color threshold.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Understanding the printer menus 182

Use To
Contrast Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
0–5 Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
‑4 to 4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Print Settings
Copies Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
1–999 Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2) Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Sides (Duplex) Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
1 sided Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
2 sided
Staple Specify whether prints are stapled.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 183

Hole Punch Specify whether prints have punched holes.

Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is installed.
Hole Punch Mode Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints.
2 holes Notes:
3 holes
4 holes • 3 holes is the U.S. factory default setting. 4 holes is the international factory default
setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is installed.
Duplex Binding Define binding for two-sided pages in relation to the page orientation of the printed document.
Long edge Notes:
Short edge
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top
edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Off Notes:
2‑Up
3‑Up • Off is the factory default setting.
4‑Up • The number selected is the number of page images that are printed per side.
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Border Print a border on each page image.
None Note: None is the factory default setting.
Solid
Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Horizontal Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical • Horizontal is the factory default setting.
Vertical • Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or
landscape orientation.
Understanding the printer menus 184

Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Off Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs • Off is the factory default setting.
Between Pages • Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then a blank page is inserted between each
set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Do Not Print Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print

Print Settings

Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language Set the default printer language.
PCL Emulation Notes:
PS Emulation
• PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
• PostScript emulation uses a PostScript interpreter for
processing print jobs.
• PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs.
• Setting a printer language default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Job Waiting Determine if print jobs are removed from the print queue when
On they require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These
Off print jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print
normally. When the missing information or options, or both are
obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a non-read‑only printer hard disk
is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are
not deleted if the printer loses power.
Understanding the printer menus 185

Use To
Print Area Set the logical and physical printable area.
Normal Notes:
Whole Page
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This
setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter
and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Download Target Set the storage location for downloads.
RAM Notes:
Flash
Disk • RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.
• Storing downloads in a flash memory or in a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in the
flash memory or printer hard disk even when the printer is
turned off.
• This menu item appears only if an optional flash memory or
printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
On fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
Off print job that requires more than the available memory.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, then Memory Full [38] appears on the
printer display, but downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
Alphabetical when Print All is selected.
Oldest First Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting
Newest First
Understanding the printer menus 186

Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex) Specify whether two‑sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
1 sided Notes:
2 sided
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
Duplex Binding Define the way two‑sided pages are bound and printed.
Long Edge Notes:
Short Edge
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long
edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
1–999 Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Do Not Print Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print
Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2) Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Off Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs • Off is the factory default setting.
Between Pages • Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then a blank
page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's
and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Tray [x] Notes:
Multipurpose Feeder
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Understanding the printer menus 187

Use To
Paper Saver Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.
Off Notes:
2‑Up
3‑Up • Off is the factory default setting.
4‑Up • The number selected is the number of page images that are printed per side.
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.
Horizontal Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical • Horizontal is the factory default setting.
Vertical • Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
Landscape landscape.
Portrait
Paper Saver Border Print a border when using Paper Saver.
None Note: None is the factory default setting.
Solid
Staple Job Specify whether printed output is stapled.
Auto Notes:
Back
Dual • Off is the factory default setting.
Front • This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Off
Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Hole Punch Specify whether holes are created on printed outputs for the purpose of collecting
On the sheets in a binder or folder.
Off Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 188

Use To
Hole Punch Mode Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose of
2 holes collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
3 holes Notes:
4 holes
• 3 holes is the U.S. factory default setting. 4 holes is the international factory
default setting.
• This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Offset Pages Offset pages at certain instances.
None Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs • None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to (1,2,3)
(1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then each set of printed pages are
offset, such as all page 1's and all page 2's.
• Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless
of the number of copies printed.
• This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.

Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
300 dpi Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Pixel Boost Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally
Off or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Fonts Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Toner Darkness Lighten or darken the printed output.
1–10 Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Understanding the printer menus 189

Use To
Enhance Fine Lines Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
On circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Off Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh
users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
context menus.
• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Off
Brightness Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
‑6 to 6 by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
0–5 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Job Accounting menu

Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Job Accounting Log Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Daily Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Weekly
Monthly
Log Action at End of Frequency Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
None Note: None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Log Near Full Level Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log Action
Off at Near Full.
1–99 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 190

Use To
Log Action at Near Full Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
None Notes:
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log • None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log • The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is
Post Current Log triggered.
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Log Action at Full Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
None limit (100MB).
E‑mail & Delete Current Log Note: None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.

Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Confidential Notes:
Held
Not Restored • Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
All
affected.
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Understanding the printer menus 191

Use To
Format Flash Format the flash memory.
Yes Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
No being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
Delete Now and parked jobs.
Do Not Delete Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the
deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
Off printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.

XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On

PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Yes Note: No is the factory default setting.
No
Understanding the printer menus 192

Use To
Annotations Print annotations in a PDF.
Do Not Print Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print

PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error Print a page containing the PostScript error.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Lock PS Startup Mode Disable the SysStart file.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Font Priority Establish the font search order.
Resident Notes:
Flash/Disk
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option
card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.

PCL Emul menu

Use To
Font Source Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Resident Notes:
Disk
Download • “Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
Flash
All • “Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.
• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Courier 10 Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Understanding the printer menus 193

Use To
Symbol Set Specify the symbol set for each font name.
10U PC‑8 Notes:
12U PC‑850
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Point Size Notes:
1.00–1008.00
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Pitch Notes:
0.08–100
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Orientation Notes:
Portrait
Landscape • Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Lines per Page Notes:
1–255
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
A4 Width Notes:
198 mm
203 mm • “198 mm” is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.
Understanding the printer menus 194

Use To
PCL Emulation Settings Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
Auto CR after LF a line feed (LF) control command.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
PCL Emulation Settings Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
Auto LF after CR carriage return (CR) control command.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Tray Renumber Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
Assign MP Feeder different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Off Notes:
None
• “Off” is the factory default setting.
0–199
Assign Tray [x] • “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
Off
None
• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Tray Renumber Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Tray Renumber Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Understanding the printer menus 195

HTML menu
Use To
Font Name Joanna MT Set the default font for HTML documents.
Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font.
Apple Chancery Marigold
Arial MT MonaLisa Recut
Avant Garde Monaco
Bodoni New CenturySbk
Bookman New York
Chicago Optima
Clarendon Oxford
Cooper Black Palatino
Copperplate StempelGaramond
Coronet Taffy
Courier Times
Eurostile TimesNewRoman
Garamond Univers
Geneva Zapf Chancery
Gill Sans NewSansMTJA
Goudy NewSansMTCS
Helvetica NewSansMTCT
Hoefler Text NewSansMTKO
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

Use To
Font Size Set the default font size for HTML documents.
1–255 pt Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale Scale the default font for HTML documents.
1–400% Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Understanding the printer menus 196

Use To
Margin Size Set the page margin for HTML documents.
8–255 mm Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Do Not Print Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Print

Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
On Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
Off for some images.
Invert Invert bitonal monochrome images.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Anchor Top Left Notes:
Best Fit
Anchor Center • Best Fit is the factory default setting.
Fit Height/Width • When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Fit Height
Fit Width
Orientation Set the image orientation.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape

Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Understanding the printer menus 197

Menu item Description

Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality defects,
and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Saving money and the environment 198

Saving money and the environment

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

Using recycled paper

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 61.

Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of
the paper.

Notes:
• Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Saving money and the environment 199

Avoid paper jams

Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 242.

Saving energy

Using Hibernate mode

Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode.

Notes:
• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of
the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings

2 From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch Submit.

Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper • Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn off print log features.
3 Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 200

Adjusting Sleep mode

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.

Adjusting the brightness of the printer display

To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.

Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Saving money and the environment 201

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Securing the printer 202

Securing the printer

Using the security lock feature

The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached,
the printer is locked. When locked, the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed. Attach a
security lock to the printer in the location shown.

Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs,
as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Securing the printer 203

In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.

Erasing non‑volatile memory

Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons when the screen with
the progress bar appears.
3 From the Configuration menu, navigate to:
Restore Factory Defaults > Erase Printer Memory > Yes
The printer restarts several times during this process.
4 Touch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

1 Turn off the printer.
2 From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons when the screen with
the progress bar appears.
3 From the Configuration menu, navigate to:
Restore Factory Defaults > Erase Hard Disk > select the method to erase the hard disk memory > Yes
Note: This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer is unavailable
for other user tasks.
4 Touch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 204

Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a hard disk installed.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen
with the progress bar appears.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption erases the contents of the hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer is unavailable
for other user tasks.
• A status bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk is encrypted, the printer returns to
the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power-on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.

Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, go to the Lexmark security Web page
or see the Embedded Web Server—Security: Administrator’s Guide at http://support.lexmark.com.
Maintaining the printer 205

Maintaining the printer

Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.

Cleaning printer parts

Cleaning the printer

Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior
of the printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Open the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 206

2 Wipe the areas shown with a soft or lint‑free cloth.

1 White underside of the scanner cover

2 Scanner glass
3 ADF glass
4 White underside of the ADF cover

3 Close the scanner cover.

Cleaning the charger and the printhead lens

1 Open the bottom front door.
Maintaining the printer 207

2 Remove the waste toner bottle.

3 Locate the white tab.

4 Gently pull the tab until it stops, and then slowly slide it back into place. Repeat three times.
Maintaining the printer 208

5 Remove the printhead wiper.

6 Insert the wiper into the hole until it stops, and then slide it out. Repeat three times.

7 Put the wiper back to its holder.

8 Reinstall the waste toner bottle.

9 Close the bottom front door.

Maintaining the printer 209

Emptying the hole punch box

1 Open door H.

2 Remove and empty the hole punch box.

Maintaining the printer 210

3 Reinstall the hole punch box.

4 Close door H.

Checking the status of parts and supplies

A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.

Estimated number of remaining pages

The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
Maintaining the printer 211

The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial estimates assume
future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization* test methods and page
content.
* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.

Ordering supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark Authorized
Supplies Dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Ordering a toner cartridge

Notes:
• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
Part name Part number
High Yield Toner Cartridge 64G0H00

Ordering a photoconductor unit

Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause photoconductor unit parts to fail prior to
exhaustion of toner.
Item Part number
Photoconductor unit 54G0P00

Ordering a waste toner bottle

Item Part number
Waste toner bottle 54G0W00
Maintaining the printer 212

Ordering staple cartridges

Item Part number
Staple cartridges 25A0013

Ordering a 300K maintenance kit

Note: To replace the parts included in the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet that came with each part.
Item Part number
Maintenance kit 40X9669

Storing parts and supplies

Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust

Storing the rollers

Your printer comes with replacement rollers stored in the compartment inside the standard trays. After you purchase
new rollers, make sure to store them in the compartments inside the trays.

Note: For proper disposal of parts and supplies, see “Recycling” on page 200.
Maintaining the printer 213

Replacing supplies

Replacing a photoconductor unit

1 Open the bottom front door.

2 Remove the waste toner bottle.

Maintaining the printer 214

3 Unlock the photoconductor unit.

4 Remove the photoconductor unit.

5 Unpack the new photoconductor unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.
6 Install the photoconductor unit.
Maintaining the printer 215

7 Lock the photoconductor unit.

8 Reinstall the waste toner bottle.

9 Close the bottom front door.

Replacing the staple cartridge

Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple finisher

Note: The staple finisher is supported only in select printer models.
1 Press the latch on the staple finisher, and then slide the finisher to the left.
Maintaining the printer 216

2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.

3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the cartridge holder.

4 Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder.

Maintaining the printer 217

5 Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clicks into place.

6 Slide the finisher back into place.

Maintaining the printer 218

Replacing the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher

1 Open door H, and then pull out the booklet maker.

2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.

Maintaining the printer 219

3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the cartridge holder.

4 Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder.

5 Push the cartridge holder into the booklet maker until the holder clicks into place.

6 Push the booklet maker back into place, and then close the door.
Maintaining the printer 220

Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple, hole punch finisher

1 Open door H.

2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.

3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the cartridge holder.

Maintaining the printer 221

4 Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder.

5 Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clicks into place.

6 Close door H.

Replacing the toner cartridge

1 Open the top front door.

2 Rotate the toner cartridge counterclockwise, and then pull it out.

Maintaining the printer 222

3 Unpack the new toner cartridge, remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to redistribute the
toner.

4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer.

5 Rotate the cartridge clockwise to lock it into place.

Maintaining the printer 223

6 Close the top front door.

7 Clean the charger and the printhead lens. For more information, see “Cleaning the charger and the printhead lens”
on page 206.

Replacing the waste toner bottle

1 Open the bottom front door.
Maintaining the printer 224

2 Remove the waste toner bottle.

3 Clean the charger and the printhead lens. For more information, see steps 3–7 of “Cleaning the charger and the
printhead lens” on page 206.
4 Unpack the new waste toner bottle.
5 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer until it clicks into place.

6 Close the bottom front door.

Maintaining the printer 225

Replacing the 300K maintenance kit

Replacing the exhaust and ozone filters

1 Exhaust filter
2 Ozone filter

Replacing the exhaust filter

1 Pull out the exhaust filter.

2 Unpack the new exhaust filter.

Maintaining the printer 226

3 Insert the new filter.

Replacing the ozone filter

1 Pull out the ozone filter.

2 Unpack the new ozone filter.

3 Insert the new filter.

Maintaining the printer 227

Replacing the pick, feed, and separator rollers

1 Pick roller
2 Feed roller
3 Separator roller

Note: You can use the rollers stored in the compartment inside the standard trays. For more information, see
“Storing the rollers” on page 212.
1 Turn off the printer.
Maintaining the printer 228

2 Remove all trays.

• Standard tray

• Optional 2 x 500‑ or 2500‑sheet tray

Note: To remove the optional 2 x 500‑sheet tray, follow the procedure in removing the standard tray.

3 Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
Note: If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, slide the tray to open the door.
Maintaining the printer 229

4 Open door D.
Notes:
• You can only open door D if the optional 2 x 500‑ or 2500‑sheet tray is installed.
• If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, slide the tray to open the door.

5 Locate the rollers.

Maintaining the printer 230

6 Remove the rollers.

7 Insert the new rollers until they click into place.

Note: Make sure to insert the rollers to their right places.

8 Close doors C and D.
9 Insert the trays.

Replacing the transfer module

Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 231

1 Turn off the printer.

2 Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Note: If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
3 Remove the door stopper.
Maintaining the printer 232

4 Loosen the screws of the transfer module lock.

5 Remove the paper guide.

6 Lift the transfer module using the handles, and then pull it out completely.

7 Unpack the new transfer module.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the transfer belt to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Maintaining the printer 233

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the transfer belt. Doing so may affect the print quality of future
print jobs.

8 Insert the new transfer module until it clicks into place.

9 Place the paper guide back into place.

10 Tighten the screws of the transfer module lock.
11 Reinstall the door stopper.
12 Close door C.

Replacing the transfer roller

1 Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
Note: If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
Maintaining the printer 234

2 Pull out the transfer roller.

3 Unpack the new transfer roller.

4 Insert the new transfer roller until it clicks into place.

5 Close door C.

Resetting the maintenance counter

1 Turn off the printer.
2 From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons when the screen with
the progress bar appears.
3 From the Configuration menu, navigate to:
Reset Maintenance Counter > Reset 300K Maintenance Kit
4 Touch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Maintaining the printer 235

Replacing the ADF scan pad

1 Open the scanner cover.

2 Remove the ADF scan pad.

3 Unpack the new ADF scan pad, and then remove the packing materials.
Maintaining the printer 236

4 Lay the ADF scan pad flat on the scanner glass with the white area facedown.

5 Close the scanner cover to stick the ADF scan pad to the cover, and then open the cover.

6 Push the corners of the ADF scan pad to secure it into place.

7 Close the scanner cover.

Maintaining the printer 237

Moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.

Before moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
• Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer’s authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

• Using a flat‑head screwdriver, reinstall the screws to lock the scanner bed in place.

Note: Remove the screws after setting up the printer in another location.
Maintaining the printer 238

• If necessary, use a cart with a surface large enough to support the full dimensions of the printer.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging.
Managing the printer 239

Managing the printer

Checking the virtual display

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e‑mail alerts

Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Managing the printer 240

Copying printer settings to other printers

Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click the Copy Printer Settings.
3 To change the language, select a language from the drop-down menu, and then click Click here to submit language.
4 Click Printer Settings.
5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields.
Note: If you want to add or remove a target printer, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6 Click Copy Printer Settings.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web

Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, near end‑of‑life, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Note: The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
SNMP Only The printer generates a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) alert when the
supply condition is reached. The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status
page.
E‑mail The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
Managing the printer 241

Notification Description
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be
replaced to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4 Click Submit.

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 50.
For a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory”
on page 203.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now
2 Apply the changes.
Clearing jams 242

Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media, and then load them properly to avoid most jams. If jams occur, then follow
the steps outlined in this chapter.
Note: Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold
the pages is needed for other printer tasks.

Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.

• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
Clearing jams 243

• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.

Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed page
has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting reprints
jammed pages only if adequate printer memory is available.

Area name
1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2 Door C
3 Door D
4 Door F
5 Trays
Clearing jams 244

Area name
6 Door H
7 Finisher bins
8 Door J
9 Area G

Area name Control panel message What to do

ADF [x]-page jam, press latch at area E to open Open the ADF top door, and then remove
ADF's top cover. [28y.xx] the jammed paper.
Multipurpose feeder [x]‑page jam, clear jammed paper from the Remove the jammed paper from the
multipurpose feeder. [200.xx] feeder.
Door C, trays [x]‑page jam, open door C and clear all Open door C, and then remove the jammed
jammed paper. [2yy.xx] paper.
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and Pull out the tray, and then remove the
open door C. [2yy.xx] jammed paper.

Door D, trays [x]‑page jam, open door D and clear all Open door D, and then remove the jammed
jammed paper. [24y.xx] paper.
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and Pull out the tray, and then remove the
open door D. [24y.xx] jammed paper.

Doors C and F [x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and Pull the 3000‑sheet tray, and then remove
open door F. [24y.xx] the jammed paper from the side of the tray.
Open door F, and then remove the jammed
paper.
Area G, doors C, J, and H, finisher [x] page jam, open doors G, H, and J and Open door G, and then remove the jammed
bin clear jammed paper. [4yy.xx] paper.
Open door H, and then remove the jammed
paper.
Doors C and G, finisher bin [x]‑page jam, press latch beside door G and Slide the staple finisher to the left, and then
slide finisher to the left. Leave paper in bin. remove the jammed paper.
[40y.xx]
Area G, doors C, J, and H, finisher [x]‑page jam, open door H and rotate knob Open door H, and then remove the jammed
bin SD3 clockwise. Leave paper in bin. [426.xx– paper.
428.xx]
Clearing jams 245

[x]‑page jam, clear jammed paper from multipurpose

feeder. [200.xx]
1 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Remove the jammed paper.

3 Open door C to remove any paper fragments.

Note: Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
4 Close door C.
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

6 Reload the paper.

[x]‑page jam, open door C and clear all jammed paper. [2yy.xx]
1 Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.

2 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Clearing jams 246

• Fuser area

• Below the fuser area

• Duplex area

• Above the duplex area

Clearing jams 247

3 Open the standard trays, and then locate the jammed paper.

4 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

5 Close the trays and door C.

[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door

C. [2yy.xx]
1 Slide the 3000‑sheet tray.
Clearing jams 248

2 Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.

3 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
• Fuser area

• Below the fuser area

Clearing jams 249

• Duplex area

• Above the duplex area

4 Open the standard trays, and then locate the jammed paper.

5 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

6 Close the trays and door C.

7 Slide the 3000‑sheet tray back into place.

[x]‑page jam, open door D and clear all jammed paper. [24y.xx]
1 Open door D, and then remove the jammed paper.
Clearing jams 250

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

2 Open the optional tray, and then locate the jammed paper.

3 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the tray and door D.

Clearing jams 251

[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door

D. [24y.xx]
1 Slide the 3000‑sheet tray.

2 Open door D, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3 Open the optional tray, and then locate the jammed paper.

4 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 252

5 Close the tray and door D.

6 Slide the 3000‑sheet tray back into place.

[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door

F. [24y.xx]
1 Slide the 3000‑sheet tray.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 253

3 Open door F, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close door F.
5 Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.

6 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:

Clearing jams 254

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
• Fuser area

• Below the fuser area

• Duplex area
Clearing jams 255

• Above the duplex area

7 Close door C, and then slide the 3000‑sheet tray back into place.

[x]‑page jam, open doors G, H, and J and clear jammed paper.

Leave paper in bin. [4yy.xx]
1 Open door G, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

2 Open door J, and then lift handle J1 to its upright position.

Clearing jams 256

3 Open door H.

4 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
• Door J

Note: If there is a jammed paper between the finisher bins, then remove the paper.
Clearing jams 257

• Areas H1 and H2

• Areas H3 and H4

• Area H6

5 Close Door H.
6 Open door C, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
Clearing jams 258

Notes:
• Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
• If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
7 Close door C.

[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G. Leave paper in

bin. [40y.xx]
1 Remove all paper from the staple finisher bin.
Clearing jams 259

2 Press the latch and slide the staple finisher to the left, and then remove the jammed paper.

Notes:
• Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
• If necessary, turn spinner wheel G1 downward to feed jammed paper into the finisher bin, and then remove
the paper.
Clearing jams 260

3 Slide the finisher back into place.

4 Open door C, and then remove the jammed paper.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Notes:
• Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
• Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
• If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
5 Close door C.
Clearing jams 261

[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G and clear jammed

staples. Leave paper in bin. [402.93]
1 Remove all paper from the staple finisher bin.

2 Press the latch on the staple finisher, and then slide the finisher to the left.

3 Remove the staple cartridge holder.

Clearing jams 262

4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any loose staples.

5 Press the staple guard down until it clicks into place.

6 Press the staples against the metal bracket.

Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the staples near
the metal bracket.
Clearing jams 263

7 Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clicks into place.

8 Slide the finisher back into place.

Clearing jams 264

[x]‑page jam, open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise. Leave

paper in bin. [426.xx–428.xx]
If the jammed paper is located under door G, then open the door and remove the paper.

1 Open door J, and then lift handle J1.

2 Open door H.
Clearing jams 265

3 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
• Door J

Note: If there is a jammed paper between the finisher bins, then remove the paper.

• Areas H1 and H2
Clearing jams 266

• Areas H3 and H4

• Area H6

4 Using handle H5, pull out the booklet maker.

5 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 267

• Area H8

• Area H9
Clearing jams 268

• Area H10

6 Push the booklet maker back into place.

7 Close door H.
8 Open door C, and then remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Notes:
• Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
• Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
• If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
9 Close door C.
Clearing jams 269

[x]‑page jam, press latch at area E to open ADF’s top

cover. [28y.xx]
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2 Open the top ADF top cover.

3 Remove jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the cover.

5 Open the scanner cover, and then open the bottom ADF door.

6 Remove jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 270

7 Close the door.

8 Close the scanner cover.

Troubleshooting 271

Troubleshooting

Understanding the printer messages

Cartridge low [88.xy]

You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge very low [88.xy]

You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see “Replacing the toner cartridge” on
page 221.
If necessary, touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the control
panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Use current [paper source] to use the available paper size and type in the tray.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the size and type of paper in the Paper menu
on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Use current [paper source] to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or feeder.
Troubleshooting 272

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Use current [paper source] to use the available paper size and type in the tray.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Close door [x]

Close the specified door.

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
• Install additional printer memory.

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]

Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• The tray for the print job has been removed.
• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Defective flash detected [51]

Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Troubleshooting 273

Disk full [62]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with larger capacity.

Disk full, scan job canceled

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Disk must be formatted for use in this device

From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Empty the hole punch box

Try one or more of the following:
• Empty the hole punch box.
• Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the print job.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.

An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.

An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Troubleshooting 274

Fax memory full

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray or feeder, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper
menu on the control panel.
• Make sure that the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check the length and width guides and make sure that the paper is loaded properly in the tray or feeder.
• From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and then print using a different tray.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 275

Insert hole punch box

Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.

Insert Tray [x]

Try one or more of the following:
• Insert the specified tray into the printer.
• Cancel the print job.
• Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory to collate job [37]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]

Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Insufficient space between paper stacks in Tray 3

Move the paper stacks apart, and then touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 276

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper on the
control panel.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper on the
control panel.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper on the control panel.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper
on the control panel.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the current job.

Load Multipurpose Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the control panel, touch one of the following:
– Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and continue printing.
– Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
– Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 277

Load Multipurpose Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the control panel, touch one of the following:
– Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and continue printing.
– Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
– Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Multipurpose Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the control panel, touch one of the following:
– Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and continue printing.
– Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
– Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Multipurpose Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the control panel, touch one of the following:
– Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and continue printing.
– Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
– Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace or insert the staple cartridge in the finisher.
For instructions on inserting or replacing a staple cartridge in the finisher, touch More information on the printer
control panel.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 278

Load staples [G11, G12]

Try one or more of the following:
• Replace or insert the staple cartridge into the finisher.
For instructions on replacing or inserting the staple cartridge into the finisher, touch More information on the
control panel.
• From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the print job.

[x] maintenance kit very low [80.xy]

You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, go to the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Memory full [38]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Install additional printer memory.

Memory full, cannot print faxes

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after
the printer is restarted.

Memory full, cannot send faxes

1 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Try one or more of the following:
• Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
• Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.

Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

Network [x] software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 279

• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Open door H and remove paper from beneath area H10

Remove the paper from the specified area.

Paper changes needed

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Parallel port [x] disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

Photoconductor low [84.xy]

You may need to order a replacement photoconductor. If necessary, select Continue on the control panel to clear the
message and continue printing.

Photoconductor very low [84.xy]

You may need to replace the photoconductor unit very soon. For more information, see “Replacing a photoconductor
unit” on page 213.
If necessary, touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 280

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner
cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive photoconductor [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:
• If the photoconductor unit is missing, then install it. For more information, see “Replacing a photoconductor unit”
on page 213.
• If the photoconductor unit is installed, then remove and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the defective photoconductor unit.

Remove defective disk [61]

Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.

Remove packaging material, [area name]

Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.

Remove packaging material, open door C, remove metal clips, remove all screws
from scanner carriage
Open door C and the scanner cover, and then remove any remaining packaging material.
Note: Make sure door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.

Remove paper from all bins

Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Troubleshooting 281

Remove paper from bin [x]

Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.

Remove paper from [linked set bin name]

Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.

Replace all originals if restarting job.

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]

Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]

Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

Printer and toner cartridge regions

Region number Region
0 Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4 Latin America
Troubleshooting 282

Region number Region

5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9 Invalid

Notes:
• The x and y values represent .xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Replace jammed originals if restarting job.

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Replace [x] maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]

The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact your service representative, and then report the message.

Replace missing photoconductor [31.xy]

Install the missing photoconductor unit to clear the message. For more information, see “Replacing a photoconductor
unit” on page 213.

Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]

Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came
with the supply.

Replace missing cartridge [31.xy]

Install the missing cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see “Replacing the toner cartridge” on page
221.
Troubleshooting 283

Replace paper pick rollers in [paper source], use parts and instructions in tray 1 or
tray 2 compartment [80]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the pick rollers, and then touch Rollers replaced on the control panel to clear the message and continue
printing.
• Touch Continue and replace later (Jams may continue to occur) to ignore the message and continue printing.

Replace photoconductor, 0 pages remain [84.xy]

Replace the photoconductor unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply or see “Replacing a photoconductor unit” on page 213.
Note: If you do not have a replacement photoconductor unit, then see “Ordering supplies” on page 211 or go to
www.lexmark.com.

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]

Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace unsupported photoconductor [32.xy]

Remove the photoconductor unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see “Replacing a photoconductor unit” on
page 213.
Note: If you do not have a replacement photoconductor unit, then see “Ordering supplies” on page 211 or go to
www.lexmark.com.

Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]

Replace the waste toner bottle to clear the message.

Restore held jobs?

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]

Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 284

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner maintenance required, use ADF Kit [80]

The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact your service representative, and then report the message.

Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]

Contact customer support, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.

Serial port [x] disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
• Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.

Some held jobs were not restored

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Standard network software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
Troubleshooting 285

• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.

Standard USB port disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Supply needed to complete job

Do either of the following:
• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.

The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled or
provide unexpected results.
Touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Too many flash options installed [58]

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue on the control panel to continue printing.
• Remove the extra flash memory:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Too many trays attached [58]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 286

Tray [x] paper size unsupported

Replace with a supported paper size.

Unformatted flash detected [53]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.

Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]

You may need to order a waste toner bottle. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the
message and continue printing.

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 287

Solving printer problems

Basic printer problems

The printer is not responding

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Make sure the printer is turned on.

Is the printer turned on?

Step 2 Press the Sleep button Go to step 3.
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode. to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Step 3 Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the power cord into the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet. printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4 Unplug the other Go to step 5.
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet. electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
Does other electrical equipment work?
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Step 5 Go to step 6. Make sure to match the
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted following:
in the correct ports. • The USB symbol on
the cable with the
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports? USB symbol on the
printer
• The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Step 6 Turn on the switch or Go to step 7.
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker. reset the breaker.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

Troubleshooting 288

Action Yes No
Step 7 Connect the printer Go to step 8.
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power cord directly to
power supplies, or extension cords. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8 Go to step 9. Connect the printer
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer cable securely to the
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network printer and the
device. computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9 Go to step 10. Turn off the printer,
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing remove all packing
material. materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
on the printer.
removed?
Step 10 Go to step 11. Use correct printer
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver. driver settings.

Are the port settings correct?

Step 11 Go to step 12. Install the correct
Check the installed printer driver. printer driver.

Is the correct printer driver installed?

Step 12 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the support.
printer back on.

Is the printer working?

Troubleshooting 289

Printer display is blank

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.

Does Ready appear on the printer display?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the and then contact
printer back on. customer support.

Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?

Hardware and internal option problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the internal
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board. option to the controller
board.
a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is option.
listed in the Installed Features list.

Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?

Troubleshooting 290

Action Yes No
Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Check if the internal option is selected. support.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 45.
b Resend the print job.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

Internal print server does not operate correctly

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Check if the internal
Reinstall the internal print server. print server is
supported by the
a Remove, and then install the internal print server. For more
printer.
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 32.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print server Note: An internal print
is listed in the Installed Features list. server from another
printer may not work
with this printer.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check the cable and the internal print server connection. support.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected to the
internal print server.

Does the internal print server operate correctly?

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Check if you have a
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed. supported ISP.
a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal Note: An ISP from
Solutions Port” on page 32. another printer may
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the not work on this
Installed Features list. printer.

Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?

Troubleshooting 291

Action Yes No
Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check the cable and the ISP connection. support.
a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the ISP.
b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the
receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the
controller board are color‑coded.

Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?

Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.

Is the tray working?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.

Is the tray working?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer. more information, see
the setup
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
documentation that
Installed Features list.
came with the tray.

Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?

Troubleshooting 292

Action Yes No
Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver. support.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available
options in the print driver” on page 45.

Is the tray available in the printer driver?

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Check if you have a
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed. supported USB or
parallel interface card.
a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 32. Note: A USB or parallel
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel interface card from
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list. another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection. support.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the USB or parallel interface card.

Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?

Paper feed problems

Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery. The problem is solved. Contact customer
a From the home screen, navigate to: support.

> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery

b From the Jam Recovery menu, select On or Auto.
c Save your changes.

Do pages reprint after a jam?

Troubleshooting 293

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding support.
jams” on page 242.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper. Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Remove any jammed paper. support.
b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Does the paper jam message remain?

Troubleshooting 294

Solving print problems

Printing problems

Confidential and other held jobs do not print

Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Select one of the Print
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your and Hold options, and
print job is listed. then resend the print
job. For more
information, see
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
“Printing confidential
and other held jobs” on
page 73.
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
a Open the Print Properties folder.
b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents”
check box.
c Enter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.

Does the job print?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Add additional printer
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs. memory.

Does the job print?

Troubleshooting 295

Envelope seals when printing

Action Yes No
a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment. Contact customer The problem is solved.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the support.
flaps.
b Resend the print job.

Does the envelope seal when printing?

Error message about reading the flash drive appears

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port. into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.

Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?

Step 2 Wait until the printer is Go to step 3.
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green. ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
print the documents.

Is the indicator light blinking green?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Check for an error message on the display.
b Clear the message.

Does the error message still appear?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 72.

Does the error message still appear?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person. support.

Does the error message still appear?

Troubleshooting 296

Incorrect characters print

Action Yes No
Step 1 Deactivate Hex Trace Go to step 2.
Make sure that the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the display, then turn off the printer,
and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.

Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a From the control panel, select Standard Network or Network [x], and support.
then set PCL SmartSwitch or PS SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.

Do incorrect characters print?

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Check if the trays are not linked. support.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Troubleshooting 297

Large jobs do not collate

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size support.
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Multiple‑language PDF files do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.

Do the files print?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat. support.
b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.

Do the files print?

Troubleshooting 298

Print job takes longer than expected

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Disable Eco‑Mode.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > Off
Note: Disabling Eco‑Mode may increase the consumption of energy
or paper, or both.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the
job.

Did the job print?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print?

Step 4 The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
a Disable the Page Protect feature.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print?

Step 5 The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job. support.

Did the job print?

Troubleshooting 299

Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.

Do the jobs print?

Step 4 The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Step 5 The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more support.
information, see “Installing the printer” on page 45.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Troubleshooting 300

Tray linking does not work

Notes:
• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.
• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Do the trays link correctly?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper support.
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
b Resend the print job.

Do the trays link correctly?

Unexpected page breaks occur

Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout. The problem is solved. Check the original file
a From the home screen, navigate to: for manual page
breaks.
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
c Resend the print job.

Did the file print correctly?

Troubleshooting 301

Print quality problems

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you
want to use. For more information, contact your system support
person.
c Resend the print job.

Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you support.
want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your
system support person.
b Resend the print job.

Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

Clipped pages or images

Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 302

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Move the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper
loaded.
b Resend the print job.

Is the page or image clipped?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
From the control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to following:
match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
size from the tray
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray? settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the page or image clipped?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Is the page or image clipped?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit. support.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
b Resend the print job.

Is the page or image clipped?

Troubleshooting 303

Gray background on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the Quality menu on the control panel, decrease the toner
darkness.
b Resend the print job.

Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Remove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit and the toner
cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light can cause print quality problems.
b Resend the print job.

Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

Horizontal voids appear on prints

Leading edge

Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 304

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Make sure that your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b Resend the print job.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light can cause print quality problems.
b Resend the print job.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Incorrect margins on prints

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Troubleshooting 305

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.

Are the margins correct?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to following:
match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
size from the tray
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray? settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from support.
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Are the margins correct?

Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for length guides.
the size of the paper loaded.

Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Specify the paper type
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight from the
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the paper still curled?

Troubleshooting 306

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
b Resend the print job.

Is the paper still curled?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package. support.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Is the paper still curled?

Printer is printing blank pages

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Check if there is a packing material left on the photoconductor unit.
1 Remove the photoconductor unit.
2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the
photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the photoconductor unit.
b Resend the print job.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Troubleshooting 307

Action Yes No
Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Printer is printing solid black pages

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Reinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
b Resend the print job.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Print irregularities
Leading edge

ABCDE
) )

ABCDE
ABCDE Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 308

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Move the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper
size loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Specify the paper size
From the control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to and type in the tray
match the paper loaded in the tray. settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Do the printer settings match the size and type of the paper loaded in the
tray?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight in Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 4 From the control panel, Go to step 5.
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes. set the paper texture in
the Paper menu to
match the paper
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
loaded in the tray.
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 7 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support or your service
representative.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light can
cause print quality problems.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Troubleshooting 309

Print is too dark

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a From the Quality menu on the control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
a From the control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the following:
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
b Resend the print job. type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type, texture, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 4 From the control panel, Go to step 5.
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes. change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to match
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
the paper you are
printing on.
Troubleshooting 310

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 7 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light can
cause print quality problems.

Is the print still too dark?

Print is too light

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a From the Quality menu on the control panel, increase the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper type,
From the control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the texture, and weight to
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Troubleshooting 311

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

Step 4 From the control panel, Go to step 5.
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes. change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to match
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
the paper you are
printing on.
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

Step 7 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light can
cause print quality problems.

Is the print still too light?

Repeating defects appear on prints

Troubleshooting 312

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do repeating defects still appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Replace the photoconductor unit if the distance between the defects
is equal to 95.8 mm (3.77 in.).
b Resend the print job.

Do repeating defects still appear on prints?

Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Replace the 300K maintenance kit if the distance between the defects support.
is equal to either of the following:
• 62.65 mm (2.47 in.)
• 75.85 mm (2.99 in.)
b Resend the print job.

Do repeating defects still appear on prints?

Shadow images appear on prints

Leading edge

A
ABBCCDD
A B
ABCDC D
Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Load paper with the
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray. correct paper type and
weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper
From the control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu loaded in the tray to
to match the paper loaded in the tray. match the paper type
and weight specified in
the tray settings.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Troubleshooting 313

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light can
cause print quality problems.

Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Skewed print

)E
) D
ABC E
ABCD E
ABCD
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still skewed?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray. support.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still skewed?

Troubleshooting 314

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper type
From the control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu and weight to match
to match the paper loaded in the tray. the paper loaded in the
tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Troubleshooting 315

Action Yes No
Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
From the control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in the following:
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
texture, type, and
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray? weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Troubleshooting 316

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit.
1 Remove the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the photoconductor unit.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints?
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Reinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
b Resend the print job.

Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints?
Troubleshooting 317

Action Yes No
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints?

Toner rubs off

Leading edge

ABC
DEF
Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Specify the paper type,
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type, texture, and weight
texture, and weight. from the tray settings
to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in the
tray?
Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Resend the print job. support.

Does the toner still rub off?

Toner specks appear on prints

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do toner specks appear on prints?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do toner specks appear on prints?

Troubleshooting 318

Transparency print quality is poor

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to Transparency.
match the paper loaded in the tray.

Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency. support.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print quality still poor?

Uneven print density

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print density uneven?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Is the print density uneven?

Vertical voids appear on prints

Leading edge

Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 319

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a From the control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Remove the photoconductor unit, and then reinstall it.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Clean the charger and the printhead lens.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Troubleshooting 320

Solving copy problems

Copier does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display. message.

Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the power
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and
grounded electrical outlet. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back support.
on.

Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?

Partial document or photo copies

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Place the document or
Check the placement of the document or photo. photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
upper left corner.
glass in the upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper size
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the setting to match the
tray. paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
with paper that
Size setting.
matches the paper size
setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify support.
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do copies print properly?

Troubleshooting 321

Poor copy quality

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display. message.

Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Increase the scan
Check the quality of the original document. resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3 Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF scanner glass” on
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. page 205.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4 Go to step 5. See “Print quality
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems. problems” on
page 301.
a From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
b If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Place the document or
Check the placement of the document or photo. photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
Make sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
upper left corner.
scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Change the Content
Check the copy settings. Type and Content
Source settings to
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
match the document
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is solved.
Check for patterns on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower
setting
Note: Make sure that no scaling is being selected.
b Resend the copy job.

Do patterns appear on prints?

Troubleshooting 322

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is solved.
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings:
• Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
• Contrast—Increase the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.

Do prints have missing or faded text?

Step 9 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output. support.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings of the following:
• Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.

Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?

Solving fax problems

Caller ID is not shown

Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is The problem is solved. Contact customer
subscribed to the caller ID service. support.
Notes:
• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
• Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.

Does the caller ID appear?

Troubleshooting 323

Cannot send or receive a fax

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display. message.

Is there an error or status message on the display?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the power
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and
grounded electrical outlet. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3 Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
Check the power. and then wait until
Ready appears on the
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
display.
on the display.

Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Step 4 Go to step 5. Securely connect the
Check the printer connections. cables.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine

Are the cable connections secure?

Step 5 The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Troubleshooting 324

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. Connect the printer to
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct an analog phone
digital connector. service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-
interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital

connector?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • Try calling the fax
Check for a dial tone. number to make
sure that it is
Did you hear a dial tone? working properly.
• If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.
• If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.
Step 8 The problem is solved. Go to step 9.
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 9 The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Troubleshooting 325

Action Yes No
Step 10 The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 11 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Scan the original document one page at a time. support.
a Dial the fax number.
b Scan the document one page at a time.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Can receive but not send faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.

Can you send faxes?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Load the original document properly into the ADF tray or on the scanner
glass.

Can you send faxes?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Set up the shortcut number properly. support.
• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.
• Dial the telephone number manually.

Can you send faxes?

Troubleshooting 326

Can send but not receive faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.

Can you receive faxes?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.

Can you receive faxes?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction support.
sheet that came with the supply.

Can you receive faxes?

Fax and e-mail functions are not set up

Notes:
• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Troubleshooting 327

Action Yes No
a From the home screen, navigate to: The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >
Submit
b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.

c Select a language, and then touch .

d Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
e Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
f Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.

Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?

Received fax has poor print quality

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Troubleshooting 328

Action Yes No
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Replace the toner cartridge. support.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Troubleshooting 329

Solving scanner problems

Cannot scan from a computer

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer
display before scanning a job.

Does Ready appear before scanning the job?

Step 2 Clear the error Go to step 3.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the message.
printer back on.

Is there an error message on the printer display?

Step 3 Contact customer Tighten the cable
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to support. connections.
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.

Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?

Partial document or photo scans

Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo. Contact customer Load the document or
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner support. photo facedown on the
glass in the upper left corner. scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Poor scanned image quality

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error Go to step 2.
Check if an error message appears on the display. message.

Is there an error message on the printer display?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Increase the scan
Check the quality of the original document. resolution settings for a
higher‑quality output.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Troubleshooting 330

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth scanner glass” on
dampened with water. page 205.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Place the document or
Check the placement of the document or photo. photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
Make sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
upper left corner.
scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Step 5 Go to step 6. See “Print quality
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems. problems” on
page 301.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Change the Content
Check the scan settings. Type and Content
Source settings to
From the Scan screen, make sure that the Content Type and Content
match the document
Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
being scanned.

Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7 Problem solved. Contact customer
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output. support.

Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?

Scan job was not successful

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Connect the cables
Check the cable connections. properly.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.

Are the cables securely connected?

Step 2 Change the file name. Go to step 3.
Check if the file name is already in use.

Is the file name already in use?

Troubleshooting 331

Action Yes No
Step 3 Close the file you are Go to step 4.
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another scanning.
application or being used by another user.

Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?

Step 4 Contact customer Select the Append time
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check support. stamp or Overwrite
box is selected in the destination configuration settings. existing file check box
in the destination
configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?

Scanner unit does not close

Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit. The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Lift the scanner unit. support.
b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.

Did the scanner unit close correctly?

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.

Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Select a lower scan resolution. support.

Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

Troubleshooting 332

The scanner does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Check if the printer is turned on.

Is the printer turned on?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the printer
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the cable securely to the
computer, print server, option, or other network device. printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
network device.
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3 Go to step 4. Connect the power
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and
grounded electrical outlet. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4 Turn on the switch or Go to step 5.
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker. reset the breaker.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

Step 5 Connect the printer Go to step 6.
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power cord directly to
power supplies, or extension cords. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6 Unplug the other Go to step 7.
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet. electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
Are the other electrical equipment working?
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
Step 7 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the support.
printer back on.

Are the printer and scanner working?

Troubleshooting 333

Solving home screen application problems

An application error has occurred

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Contact customer
Check the system log for relevant details. support.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Resolve the error. support.
Is the application working now?

Embedded Web Server does not open

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Type the correct
Make sure the printer IP address is correct. printer IP address in the
address field of your
View the printer IP address:
Web browser.
• From the printer home screen
Note: Depending on
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu the network settings,
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then you may need to type
finding the TCP/IP section “https://” instead of
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by “http://” before the
periods, such as 123.123.123.123. printer IP address to
access the Embedded
Web Server.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Step 2 Go to step 3. Turn on the printer.
Check if the printer is turned on.

Is the printer turned on?

Troubleshooting 334

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. Contact your system
Check if the network connection is working. support person.

Is the network connection working?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Tighten the cable
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. connection.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.

Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Step 5 Go to step 6. Contact your system
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers. support person.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.

Are the Web proxy servers disabled?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address support.
in the address field.

Did the Embedded Web Server open?

Contacting customer support

When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message
on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the
printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
Notices 335

Notices

Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX910de, MX911dte, MX912dxe
Machine type:
7421
Model(s):
036, 236, 436

Edition notice
June 2014
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 336

Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:

Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc

Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 337

Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.

Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\NOTICES directory of the installation
software CD.

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing One-sided: 52 (MX910de), 53 (MX911de,
MX911dte), 55 (MX912de, MX912dxe);
Two-sided: 55 (MX910de, MX911de,
MX911dte), 56 (MX912de, MX912dxe)
Scanning 57 (MX910de); 56 (MX911de,
MX911dte, MX912de, MX912dxe)
Copying 53 (MX910de); 54 (MX911de,
MX911dte); 55 (MX911de, MX911dte)
Ready 29 (MX910de); 31 (MX911de,
MX911dte, MX912de, MX912dxe)
Notices 338

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.

India E-Waste notice

This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of lead,
mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules.

Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
Notices 339

ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Shipping temperature -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
15 to 85% RH

Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787-800 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
Notices 340

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)

Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic One-sided: 865 (MX910de), 925
inputs. (MX911de, MX911dte), 985 (MX912de,
MX912dxe); Two-sided: 790 (MX910de),
850 (MX911de, MX911dte), 890
(MX912de, MX912dxe)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy 880 (MX910de); 950 ( MX911de,
original documents. MX911dte); 1000 (MX912de, MX912dxe)
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 230
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 220
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 3.6
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.6
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power 0
switch is turned off.

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 341

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Notices 342

Japanese VCCI notice

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and
2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on the restrictions of
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.

Radio interference notice

Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
Notices 343

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
Notices 344

an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada

Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
Notices 345

• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Japanese telecom notice

The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified by JATE,
with Certification Number A11-0160001.

Lexmark International, Inc.

LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse

Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz

Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera

Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
Notices 346

relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Modular component notice

This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum
(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users,
the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more
than that necessary for successful communication.
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding.
Notices 347

Industrie Canada (Canada)

Selon la règlementation d'Industrie Canada, l'émetteur radio ne fonctionner qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le
gain maximal (ou inférieur) ont été approuvés par Industrie Canada. Pour réduire les interférences radio potentielles
auprès d'autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent être choisis de telle sorte que la puissance isotrope
rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne soit pas supérieure à ce qui est nécessaire pour assurer la réussite de la communication.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis
aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toutes les
interférences, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.
Pour éviter toute interférence radio au service sous licence, cet appareil est destiné à être utilisé à l'intérieur et à l'écart
des fenêtres afin d'assurer une protection maximale.

Notice to users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
Notices 348

AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK

Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Notices 349

Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,

LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
Notices 350

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Notices 351

Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
Notices 352

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Index 353

Index
Numerics adjusting copy quality 79 Change [paper source] to [custom
300K maintenance kit adjusting printer display string] load [orientation] 271
ordering 212 brightness 200 Change [paper source] to [custom
adjusting Sleep mode 200 type name] load [orientation] 271
adjusting toner darkness 71 Change [paper source] to [paper
Symbols advanced options, touch‑screen size] load [orientation] 271
[x] maintenance kit very low copy 83 Change [paper source] to [paper
[80.xy] 278 e‑mail 88 type] [paper size] load
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. fax 111 [orientation] 272
[200.xx] 245 FTP 116 changing output file type
[x]‑page jam, detach the answering machine e‑mailing 86
3000‑sheet tray and open door F. setting up 91 charger
[24y.xx] 252 AppleTalk menu 134 cleaning 206
[x]‑page jam, open door C and clear applications checking an unresponsive
all jammed media. [2yy.xx] 245 home screen 22 printer 287
[x]‑page jam, open door D and clear understanding 21 checking status of parts and
all jammed media. [24y.xx] 249 attaching cables 44 supplies 210
[x]‑page jam, open door H and automatic document feeder (ADF) checking the status of parts and
rotate knob H6 clockwise. Leave using 14 supplies 210
paper in bin. [426.xx–428.xx] 264 available internal options 27 checking the virtual display
[x]‑page jam, open doors G, H, and J avoiding jams 63 using the Embedded Web
and clear jammed paper. Leave avoiding paper jams 242 Server 239
paper in bin. [400–402] 255 checking virtual display
[x]‑page jam, press latch at area E
to open ADF’s top cover. [28y.xx]
B using the Embedded Web
Bin Setup menu 126 Server 239
printer messages 269 cleaning
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access blocking junk faxes 108
buttons, control panel 15 exterior of the printer 205
area G and clear jammed scanner glass 205
staples. Leave paper in bin. buttons, touch screen
using 18 cleaning the charger 206
[402.93] 261 cleaning the printer 205
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access cleaning the printhead lens 206
area G. Leave paper in bin. C Close door [x] 272
[40y.xx] 258 cables collate
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet Ethernet 44 copy options 82
tray and open door C. [2yy.xx] 247 USB 44 collating copies
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet canceling a fax job 109 copying 79
tray and open door D. [24y.xx] 251 canceling a print job Complex page, some data may not
from a computer 75 have printed [39] 272
A from the printer control panel 75 confidential data
accessing the controller board 27 canceling an e-mail 86 information on securing 204
accessing the Embedded Web cannot open Embedded Web confidential jobs
Server 20 Server 333 modifying print settings 74
Active NIC menu 129 Card Copy confidential print jobs 73
adapter plug 99 setting up 23 printing from a Macintosh
adding hardware options card stock computer 73
print driver 45 tips 58 printing from Windows 73
ADF scan pad Cartridge low [88.xy] 271 Confidential Print menu 143
replacing 235 Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 271
Cartridge very low [88.xy] 271
Index 354

Configuration change, some held sides (duplex) 82 customer support

jobs were not restored [57] 272 copy quality contacting 334
configuration information adjusting 79
wireless network 46 copy screen D
Configure MP menu 121 advanced options 83 darkness
configuring content source 82 copy options 82
multiple printers 240 content type 82 e‑mail options 87
configuring e‑mail settings 84 options 81, 82 fax options 110
configuring port settings 49 Copy Settings menu 157 scan options 115
configuring supply notifications 240 copy troubleshooting date and time, fax
connecting printer to distinctive copier does not respond 320 setting 104
ring service 104 partial document or photo daylight saving time, faxing 105
connecting the printer to an copies 320 Default Source menu 118
outlet 10 poor copy quality 321 Defective flash detected [51] 272
connecting to a wireless network poor scanned image quality 329 delayed send
using PIN (Personal Identification scanner unit does not close 331 fax options 111
Number) method 48 copying device and network settings
using Push Button Configuration canceling a copy job 81 information
method 48 creating shortcuts using the erasing 203
using the Embedded Web printer control panel 77 different paper sizes, copying 78
Server 49 on both sides of the paper different size
using wireless setup wizard 47 (two‑sided) 79 copying to 78
conservation settings copying different paper sizes 78 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
brightness, adjusting 200 copying from fax setup 95
conserving supplies 198 selected tray 78 digital telephone service
Eco‑Mode 199 copying multiple pages on one fax setup 98
Hibernate mode 199 sheet 80 directory list
Sleep Mode 200 copying on both sides of the paper printing 75
conserving supplies 198 (two‑sided) 79 Disk full [62] 273
contacting customer support 334 copying on letterhead 77 Disk full, scan job canceled 273
content copying on transparencies 77 Disk must be formatted for use in
e‑mail settings 87 copying photos 76 this device 273
content source copying to a different size 78 display troubleshooting
e‑mail settings 87 creating a fax destination shortcut printer display is blank 289
fax options 111 using the Embedded Web display, control panel 15
content type Server 107 display, printer control panel
e‑mail settings 87 creating an e‑mail shortcut adjusting brightness 200
fax options 111 using the control panel 85 disposing of printer hard disk 202
control panel 15 creating an FTP shortcut distinctive ring service, fax
factory defaults, restoring 241 using the Embedded Web connecting to 104
control panel, printer Server 112 documents, printing
indicator light 15 Custom Bin Names menu 125 from Macintosh 70
Sleep button light 15 custom job from Windows 70
controller board copying 80 door C
accessing 27 Custom Names menu 125 paper jams, clearing 245, 247
copies custom paper type door D
copy options 82 assigning 57 paper jams, clearing 249, 251
copy options custom paper type name DSL filter 95
collate 82 creating 57
copies 82 Custom Scan Sizes menu 125
darkness 82 Custom Types menu 125
E
Save As Shortcut 82 Eco‑Mode setting 199
Index 355

Edit Security Setups menu 141 Ethernet setup fax and e‑mail functions
embedded solutions information preparing for an 46 setting up 326
erasing 203 exhaust filter fax and e‑mail functions are not set
Embedded Web Server replacing 225 up 326
accessing 20 exporting a configuration fax job
adjusting brightness 200 using the Embedded Web canceling 109
checking the status of parts 210 Server 26 Fax memory full 274
checking the status of EXT port 44 Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
supplies 210 exterior of the printer menu 162
copying settings to other cleaning 205 fax name, setting 104
printers 240 e‑mail fax number, setting 104
creating a fax destination canceling 86 fax options
shortcut 107 e‑mail alerts content source 111
creating an FTP shortcut 112 low supply levels 239 content type 111
creating e‑mail shortcuts 85 paper jam 239 darkness 110
initial fax setup 90 setting up 239 delayed send 111
modifying confidential print e‑mail options page setup 111
settings 74 darkness 87 resolution 110
problem accessing 333 message 87 scan preview 111
setting up e‑mail alerts 239 original size 87 Fax partition inoperative. Contact
Embedded Web Server—Security: page setup 88 system administrator. 274
Administrator’s Guide recipient(s) 86 fax port 44
where to find 204 resolution 87 fax screen
emission Save As Shortcut 87 advanced options 111
notices 337, 341, 342, 346, 347 Send As 87 options 111
Empty the hole punch box 273 subject 86 Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
emptying the hole punch box 209 e‑mail screen Contact system administrator. 274
encrypting the printer hard advanced options 88 fax setup
disk 204 options 87, 88 country‑ or region‑specific 99
enlarging a copy 79 E‑mail Settings menu 170 digital telephone service 98
envelopes e‑mail shortcut, creating DSL connection 95
tips on using 58 using the control panel 85 standard telephone line
environmental settings e‑mail shortcuts, creating connection 91
conserving supplies 198 using the Embedded Web VoIP 96
Eco‑Mode 199 Server 85 Fax Station Name not set up.
Hibernate mode 199 e‑mail, sending Contact system administrator. 274
printer display brightness, using a shortcut number 86 Fax Station Number not set up.
adjusting 200 e‑mailing Contact system administrator. 274
Sleep Mode 200 configuring e‑mail settings 84 fax troubleshooting
Erase Temporary Data Files creating shortcuts using the caller ID is not shown 322
menu 144 Embedded Web Server 85 can receive but not send
erasing hard disk memory 203 using a shortcut number 86 faxes 325
erasing non‑volatile memory 203 using the address book 86 can send but not receive
erasing volatile memory 203 e‑mailing a document faxes 326
Error reading USB drive. Remove using the control panel 85 cannot send or receive a fax 323
USB. 273 received fax has poor print
Error reading USB hub. Remove F quality 327
hub. 273 factory defaults faxing
Ethernet network restoring 241 blocking junk faxes 108
preparing to set up for Ethernet fax changing resolution 108
printing 46 sending at a scheduled time 106 configuring the printer to observe
Ethernet port 44 daylight saving time 105
Index 356

creating shortcuts using the G inserting a header or footer

Embedded Web Server 107 General Settings menu 148 copying 81
creating shortcuts using the green settings installing a memory card 30
printer control panel 107 Eco‑Mode 199 installing an optional card 31
distinctive ring service 104 Hibernate mode 199 installing hardware options
fax setup 90 order of installation 38
forwarding faxes 110 installing printer 45
holding faxes 109 H installing the optional trays 38
making a fax lighter or darker 108 hardware options, adding Insufficient memory for Flash
sending a fax at a scheduled print driver 45 Memory Defragment operation
time 106 held jobs 73 [37] 275
setting the date and time 104 printing from a Macintosh Insufficient memory to collate job
setting the fax number 104 computer 73 [37] 275
setting the outgoing fax name 104 printing from Windows 73 Insufficient memory to support
viewing a fax log 108 Help menu 196 Resource Save feature [35] 275
FCC notices 337, 342, 346 Hibernate mode Insufficient memory, some Held
feet using 199 Jobs were deleted [37] 275
stabilizing 38 hiding icons on the home screen 21 Insufficient memory, some held
file name holding faxes 109 jobs will not be restored [37] 275
scan options 115 hole punch 82 Insufficient space between paper
finding more information about the hole punch box stacks in Tray 3 275
printer 9 emptying 209 internal options 27
finding printer IP address 20 home screen internal print server
finisher customizing 21 troubleshooting 290
supported paper sizes 67 hiding icons 21 Internal Solutions Port
supported paper types 67 showing icons 21 changing port settings 49
supported paper weights 67 home screen applications troubleshooting 290
Finishing menu 186 configuring 22 Internal Solutions Port (ISP)
firmware card 27 finding information 22 installing 32
flash drive home screen buttons and icons IP address of computer
printing from 71 description 16 finding 20
scanning 114 HTML menu 195 IP address, printer
Flash Drive menu 179 finding 20
flash drives I IPv6 menu 132
supported file types 72 icons on the home screen
font sample list hiding 21 J
printing 74 showing 21 jams
Forms and Favorites Image menu 196 avoiding 242
setting up 22 importing a configuration locating jam areas 243
forwarding faxes 110 using the Embedded Web locations 243
FTP Server 26 numbers 243
FTP options 115 Incorrect paper size, open [paper jams, clearing
FTP address source] [34] 274 in 3000‑sheet tray 252
creating shortcuts using the indicator light 15 in door C 252
printer control panel 113 individual settings information in door F 252
FTP address, scanning to erasing 203 in multipurpose feeder 245
using the control panel 113 initial fax setup 90 in top ADF door 269
FTP options using the Embedded Web Job Accounting menu 189
FTP 115 Server 90
FTP screen Insert hole punch box 275
advanced options 116 Insert Tray [x] 275
FTP Settings menu 175
Index 357

L Memory full, cannot send Standard USB 134

labels, paper faxes 278 Substitute Size 122
tips 59 menu settings TCP/IP 131
letterhead loading on multiple printers 240 Universal Setup 126
copying on 77 menu settings page Utilities 190
loading, multipurpose feeder 59 printing 50 Wireless 133
loading, trays 59 menus XPS 191
line filter 95 Active NIC 129 menus diagram 117
LINE port 44 AppleTalk 134 message
linking trays 56, 57 Bin Setup 126 e‑mail options 87
Load [paper source] with [custom Confidential Print 143 Miscellaneous Security Settings
string] [paper orientation] 276 Configure MP 121 menu 142
Load [paper source] with [custom Copy Settings 157 mobile device
type name] [paper orientation] 276 Custom Bin Names 125 printing from 72
Load [paper source] with [paper Custom Names 125 moving the printer 10, 237
size] [paper orientation] 276 Custom Scan Sizes 125 Multi Send
Load [paper source] with [paper Custom Types 125 adding a profile 24
type] [paper size] [paper Default Source 118 setting up 24
orientation] 276 diagram of 117 multipurpose feeder
Load Multipurpose Feeder with Edit Security Setups 141 loading 53
[custom string] [paper Erase Temporary Data Files 144 MyShortcut
orientation] 276 E‑mail Settings 170 about 23
Load Multipurpose Feeder with Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 162
[custom type name] [paper Finishing 186 N
orientation] 277 Flash Drive 179 Network [x] menu 129
Load Multipurpose Feeder with FTP Settings 175 Network [x] software error
[paper size] [paper orientation] 277 General Settings 148 [54] 278
Load Multipurpose Feeder with Help 196 Network Card menu 131
[paper type] [paper size] [paper HTML 195 Network Reports menu 130
orientation] 277 Image 196 network setup page
Load staples 277 IPv6 132 printing 50
Load staples [G11, G12] 278 Job Accounting 189 No analog phone line connected to
loading letterhead Miscellaneous Security modem, fax is disabled. 278
paper orientation 59 Settings 142 noise emission levels 337
loading the multipurpose feeder 53 Network [x] 129 non‑volatile memory 202
loading trays 51 Network Card 131 erasing 203
lock, security 202 Network Reports 130 Not enough free space in flash
Paper Loading 123 memory for resources [52] 279
Paper Size/Type 118 notices 336, 337, 338, 339, 340,
M Paper Texture 122
maintenance counter, 341, 342, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347
Parallel [x] 136 number of remaining pages
resetting 234 PCL Emul 192
making copies using paper from estimate 210
PDF 191
selected tray 78 PostScript 192
memory Quality 188
O
types installed on printer 202 Reports 128 Open door H and remove paper
memory card 27 Security Audit Log 145 from beneath area H10 279
installing 30 Serial [x] 138 optional 2 x 500‑sheet tray
Memory full [38] 278 Set Date and Time 146 installing 38
Memory full, cannot print Setup 184 optional 2500‑sheet tray
faxes 278 SMTP Setup 140 installing 38
Standard Network 129
Index 358

optional card paper feed troubleshooting placing separator sheets between

installing 31 message remains after jam is copies
optional trays cleared 293 copying 80
installing 38 paper jams port settings
options avoiding 242 configuring 49
firmware cards 27 paper jams, clearing PostScript menu 192
Internal Solutions Port (ISP) 32 door C 245, 247 power cord socket 44
memory card 27, 30 door D 249, 251 power switch
printer hard disk, removing 36 in 3000‑sheet tray 252 printer 227
options, copy screen in bottom ADF door 269 preparing to set up the printer on
copy from 81 in door C 252 an Ethernet network 46
scale 82 in door F 252 print driver
options, touch‑screen in multipurpose feeder 245 hardware options, adding 45
copy 81 Paper Loading menu 123 print irregularities 307
e‑mail 87, 88 paper size print job
fax 111 setting 51 canceling, from computer 75
ordering Paper Size/Type menu 118 print quality
300K maintenance kit 212 paper sizes cleaning the scanner glass 205
photoconductor unit 211 supported 63 replacing a photoconductor
staple cartridges 212 Paper Texture menu 122 unit 213
ordering supplies paper type print quality troubleshooting
toner cartridge 211 setting 51 blank pages 306
waste toner bottle 211 paper types characters have jagged edges 301
organizing cables 44 supported by printer 66 clipped pages or images 301
original size paper weights gray background on prints 303
e‑mail options 87 supported by printer 66 horizontal voids appear on
scan options 115 Parallel [x] menu 136 prints 303
output file type Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 279 print irregularities 307
changing 86 parts print is too dark 309
scan image 115 checking status 210 print is too light 310
ozone filter checking, from printer control printer is printing solid black
replacing 225 panel 210 pages 307
checking, using the Embedded repeating defects appear on
P Web Server 210 prints 311
page setup storing 212 shadow images appear on
e‑mail options 88 using genuine Lexmark 211 prints 312
fax options 111 parts, ordering skewed print 313
scan options 116 300K maintenance kit 212 streaked horizontal lines appear
paper PCL Emul menu 192 on prints 314
characteristics 60 PDF menu 191 streaked vertical lines 315
different sizes, copying 78 Personal Identification Number toner fog or background shading
letterhead 61 method appears on prints 316
preprinted forms 61 using 48 toner rubs off 317
recycled 61 phone splitter 96 toner specks appear on prints 317
saving 80 Photoconductor low [84.xy] 279 transparency print quality is
selecting 61 photoconductor unit poor 318
storing 60, 63 ordering 211 uneven print density 318
unacceptable 61 replacing 213 white streaks 318
using recycled 198 Photoconductor very low print quality, troubleshooting
Paper changes needed 279 [84.xy] 279 cleaning the charger 206
paper characteristics 60 photos cleaning the printhead lens 206
copying 76
Index 359

print troubleshooting [x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. Defective flash detected [51] 272
envelope seals when printing 295 [200.xx] 245 Disk full [62] 273
error reading flash drive 295 [x]‑page jam, detach the Disk full, scan job canceled 273
held jobs do not print 294 3000‑sheet tray and open door Disk must be formatted for use in
incorrect characters print 296 F. [24y.xx] 252 this device 273
incorrect margins on prints 304 [x]‑page jam, open door C and Disk near full. Securely clearing
jammed pages are not clear all jammed media. disk space. 273
reprinted 292 [2yy.xx] 245 Empty the hole punch box 273
job prints from wrong tray 296 [x]‑page jam, open door D and Error reading USB drive. Remove
job prints on wrong paper 296 clear all jammed media. USB. 273
jobs do not print 299 [24y.xx] 249 Error reading USB hub. Remove
Large jobs do not collate 297 [x]‑page jam, open door H and hub. 273
multiple‑language PDF files do not rotate knob H6 clockwise. Leave Fax memory full 274
print 297 paper in bin. [426.xx– Fax partition inoperative. Contact
paper curl 305 428.xx] 264 system administrator. 274
paper frequently jams 293 [x]‑page jam, open doors G, H, and Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
print job takes longer than J and clear jammed paper. Leave Contact system
expected 298 paper in bin. [400–402] 255 administrator. 274
tray linking does not work 300 [x]‑page jam, press latch at area E Fax Station Name not set up.
unexpected page breaks to open ADF’s top cover. Contact system
occur 300 [28y.xx] 269 administrator. 274
printer 45 [x]‑page jam, press latch to access Fax Station Number not set up.
basic model 11 area G and clear jammed Contact system
connecting to an outlet 10 staples. Leave paper in bin. administrator. 274
fully configured 11 [402.93] 261 Incorrect paper size, open [paper
minimum clearances 10 [x]‑page jam, press latch to access source] [34] 274
moving 10, 237 area G. Leave paper in bin. Insert hole punch box 275
selecting a location 10 [40y.xx] 258 Insert Tray [x] 275
shipping 238 [x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet Insufficient memory for Flash
printer configurations 11 tray and open door C. Memory Defragment operation
printer control panel [2yy.xx] 247 [37] 275
adjusting brightness 200 [x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet Insufficient memory to collate job
indicator light 15 tray and open door D. [37] 275
Sleep button light 15 [24y.xx] 251 Insufficient memory to support
Printer had to restart. Last job may Cartridge low [88.xy] 271 Resource Save feature [35] 275
be incomplete. 280 Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 271 Insufficient memory, some Held
printer hard disk Cartridge very low [88.xy] 271 Jobs were deleted [37] 275
disposing of 202 Change [paper source] to [custom Insufficient memory, some held
encrypting 204 string] load [orientation] 271 jobs will not be restored
removing 36 Change [paper source] to [custom [37] 275
printer hard disk encryption 204 type name] load Insufficient space between paper
printer hard disk memory [orientation] 271 stacks in Tray 3 275
erasing 203 Change [paper source] to [paper Load [paper source] with [custom
printer information size] load [orientation] 271 string] [paper orientation] 276
where to find 9 Change [paper source] to [paper Load [paper source] with [custom
printer IP address type] [paper size] load type name [paper
finding 20 [orientation] 272 orientation] 276
printer is printing blank pages 306 Close door [x] 272 Load [paper source] with [paper
printer messages Complex page, some data may not size] [paper orientation] 276
[x] maintenance kit very low have printed [39] 272 Load [paper source] with [paper
[80.xy] 278 Configuration change, some held type] [paper size] [paper
jobs were not restored [57] 272 orientation] 276
Index 360

Load Multipurpose Feeder with Replace [x] maintenance kit, 0 Supply needed to complete
[custom string] [paper estimated pages remain job 285
orientation] 276 [80.xy] 282 The device is operating in safe
Load Multipurpose Feeder with Replace all originals if restarting mode. Some print options may
[custom type name] [paper job. 281 be disabled or provide
orientation] 277 Replace cartridge, 0 estimated unexpected results. 285
Load Multipurpose Feeder with pages remain [88.xy] 281 Too many flash options installed
[paper size] [paper Replace cartridge, printer region [58] 285
orientation] 277 mismatch [42.xy] 281 Too many trays attached [58] 285
Load Multipurpose Feeder with Replace jammed originals if Tray [x] paper size
[paper type] [paper size] [paper restarting job. 282 unsupported 286
orientation] 277 Replace missing cartridge Unformatted flash detected
Load staples 277 [31.xy] 282 [53] 286
Load staples [G11, G12] 278 Replace missing photoconductor Unsupported disk 286
Memory full [38] 278 [31.xy] 282 Unsupported option in slot [x]
Memory full, cannot print Replace missing waste toner [55] 286
faxes 278 bottle [82.xy] 282 Unsupported USB hub, please
Memory full, cannot send Replace paper pick rollers in remove 273
faxes 278 [paper source], use parts and Waste toner bottle nearly full
Network [x] software error instructions in tray 1 or tray 2 [82.xy] 286
[54] 278 compartment [80] 283 Weblink server not set up. Contact
No analog phone line connected Replace photoconductor, 0 pages system administrator. 286
to modem, fax is disabled. 278 remain [84.xy] 283 printer options troubleshooting
Not enough free space in flash Replace unsupported cartridge internal option is not
memory for resources [52] 279 [32.xy] 283 detected 289
Open door H and remove paper Replace unsupported internal print server 290
from beneath area H10 279 photoconductor [32.xy] 283 Internal Solutions Port 290
Paper changes needed 279 Replace waste toner bottle tray problems 291
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 279 [82.xy] 283 USB/parallel interface card 292
Photoconductor low [84.xy] 279 Restore held jobs? 283 printer power switch 227
Photoconductor very low Scanner disabled by admin printer problems, solving basic 287
[84.xy] 279 [840.01] 283 printer security
Printer had to restart. Last job Scanner disabled. Contact system information on 204
may be incomplete. 280 administrator if problem persists. printhead lens
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [840.02] 284 cleaning 206
cartridge [31.xy] 280 Scanner jam, remove jammed printing
Reinstall missing or unresponsive originals from the scanner canceling, from the printer control
photoconductor [31.xy] 280 [2yy.xx] 284 panel 75
Remove defective disk [61] 280 Scanner maintenance required directory list 75
Remove packaging material, [area soon, use ADF Kit [80] 284 font sample list 74
name] 280 Scanner maintenance required, forms 70
Remove packaging material, open use ADF Kit [80] 284 from a mobile device 72
door C, remove metal clips, Serial port [x] disabled [56] 284 from flash drive 71
remove all screws from scanner SMTP server not set up. Contact from Macintosh 70
carriage 280 system administrator. 284 from Windows 70
Remove paper from [linked set bin Some held jobs were not menu settings page 50
name] 281 restored 284 network setup page 50
Remove paper from all bins 280 Standard network software error printing a directory list 75
Remove paper from bin [x] 281 [54] 284 printing a document 70
Remove paper from standard Standard USB port disabled printing a font sample list 74
output bin 281 [56] 285 printing a menu settings page 50
printing a network setup page 50
Index 361

printing confidential and other held Replace [x] maintenance kit, 0 replacing the staple cartridge in the
jobs estimated pages remain staple, hole punch finisher 220
from a Macintosh computer 73 [80.xy] 282 replacing the toner cartridge 221
from Windows 73 Replace all originals if restarting replacing the transfer module 230
printing forms 70 job. 281 replacing the transfer roller 233
printing from a flash drive 71 Replace cartridge, 0 estimated replacing the waste toner
printing from a mobile device 72 pages remain [88.xy] 281 bottle 223
publications Replace cartridge, printer region reports
where to find 9 mismatch [42.xy] 281 viewing 239
Push Button Configuration method Replace jammed originals if Reports menu 128
using 48 restarting job. 282 reserve print jobs 73
Replace missing cartridge printing from a Macintosh
Q [31.xy] 282 computer 73
Quality menu 188 Replace missing photoconductor printing from Windows 73
[31.xy] 282 resetting the maintenance
Replace missing waste toner bottle counter 234
R [82.xy] 282 resolution
recipient(s) Replace paper pick rollers in [paper e‑mail options 87
e‑mail options 86 source], use parts and instructions fax options 110
recycled paper in tray 1 or tray 2 compartment scan options 115
using 61, 198 [80] 283 resolution, fax
recycling Replace photoconductor, 0 pages changing 108
Lexmark packaging 201 remain [84.xy] 283 Restore held jobs? 283
Lexmark products 200 Replace unsupported cartridge restoring factory default
toner cartridges 201 [32.xy] 283 settings 241
reducing a copy 79 Replace unsupported RJ‑11 adapter 99
Reinstall missing or unresponsive photoconductor [32.xy] 283 rollers
cartridge [31.xy] 280 Replace waste toner bottle replacing 227
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [82.xy] 283
photoconductor [31.xy] 280
Remote Operator Panel
replacing parts S
pick, feed, separator rollers 227 safety information 7, 8
setting up 25 transfer module 230
Remove defective disk [61] 280 Save As Shortcut
transfer roller 233 copy options 82
Remove packaging material, [area replacing supplies
name] 280 e‑mail options 87
staple cartridge in booklet scan options 115
Remove packaging material, open finisher 218
door C, remove metal clips, remove saving paper 80
staple cartridge in staple scan image
all screws from scanner finisher 215
carriage 280 output file type 115
staple cartridge in staple, hole scan options
Remove paper from [linked set bin punch finisher 220
name] 281 darkness 115
toner cartridge 221 file name 115
Remove paper from all bins 280 waste toner bottle 223
Remove paper from bin [x] 281 original size 115
replacing the ADF scan pad 235 page setup 116
Remove paper from standard replacing the exhaust filter 225
output bin 281 resolution 115
replacing the ozone filter 225 Save As Shortcut 115
removing printer hard disk 36 replacing the pick, feed, and
repeat print jobs 73 Scan Preview 116
separator rollers 227 Send As 115
printing from a Macintosh replacing the staple cartridge in the
computer 73 Scan Preview
booklet finisher 218 scan options 116
printing from Windows 73 replacing the staple cartridge in the
repeating defects appear on scan preview
staple finisher 215 fax options 111
prints 311
Index 362

scan screen selecting a location for the SMTP server not set up. Contact
content source 115 printer 10 system administrator. 284
content type 115 selecting paper 61 SMTP Setup menu 140
Scan to Computer Send As Some held jobs were not
setting up 114 e‑mail options 87 restored 284
Scan to Network scan options 115 stabilizing feet 38
setting up 24 sending a fax using the Standard Network menu 129
using 112 computer 106 Standard network software error
scan troubleshooting sending a fax using the control 54] 284
cannot scan from a computer 329 panel 105 Standard USB menu 134
partial document or photo sending an e‑mail using the control Standard USB port disabled
scans 329 panel 85 [56] 285
scan job was not successful 330 sending fax at a scheduled staple 82
scanner unit does not close 331 time 106 staple cartridge in booklet finisher
scanning takes too long or freezes Serial [x] menu 138 replacing 218
the computer 331 Serial port [x] disabled [56] 284 staple cartridge in staple finisher
scanner serial printing replacing 215
functions 13 setting up 50 staple cartridge in staple, hole
Scanner disabled by admin Set Date and Time menu 146 punch finisher
[840.01] 283 setting replacing 220
Scanner disabled. Contact system paper size 51 staple cartridges
administrator if problem persists. paper type 51 ordering 212
[840.02] 284 TCP/IP address 131 statement of volatility 202
scanner glass setting the fax number 104 status of parts
cleaning 205 setting the outgoing fax name 104 checking 210
using 14 setting the Universal paper size 51 status of supplies
Scanner jam, remove jammed setting up e‑mail alerts 239 checking 210
originals from the scanner setting up fax storing
[2yy.xx] 284 country‑ or region‑specific 99 paper 63
Scanner maintenance required digital telephone service 98 parts 212
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 284 DSL connection 95 supplies 212
Scanner maintenance required, use standard telephone line storing print jobs 73
ADF Kit [80] 284 connection 91 streaked horizontal lines appear on
scanning VoIP connection 96 prints 314
to an FTP address 113 setting up fax and e‑mail streaked vertical lines appear on
scanning to a computer 114 functions 326 prints 315
scanning to a flash drive 114 setting up serial printing 50 streaks appear 318
scanning to an FTP address Setup menu 184 Substitute Size menu 122
creating shortcuts using the shipping the printer 238 supplies
computer 112 shortcuts, creating checking status 210
using the control panel 113 copy screen 77 checking, from printer control
scanning to network e‑mail 85 panel 210
destinations 112 fax destination 107 checking, using the Embedded
security FTP address 113 Web Server 210
modifying confidential print FTP destination 112 conserving 198
settings 74 showing icons on the home storing 212
Security Audit Log menu 145 screen 21 using genuine Lexmark 211
security lock 202 sides (duplex) using recycled paper 198
security settings information copy options 82 supplies, ordering
erasing 203 Sleep Mode photoconductor unit 211
security Web page adjusting 200 staple cartridges 212
printer security information 204 toner cartridge 211
Index 363

waste toner bottle 211 trays paper curl 305

Supply needed to complete job 285 linking 56, 57 paper frequently jams 293
supply notifications loading 51 print job takes longer than
configuring 240 unlinking 56, 57 expected 298
supported flash drives 72 troubleshooting tray linking does not work 300
supported paper sizes 63 an application error has unexpected page breaks
finisher 67 occurred 333 occur 300
supported paper types 66 cannot open Embedded Web troubleshooting, print quality
finisher 67 Server 333 blank pages 306
supported paper weights 66 checking an unresponsive characters have jagged edges 301
finisher 67 printer 287 clipped pages or images 301
switch contacting customer support 334 gray background on prints 303
printer 227 fax and e‑mail functions are not horizontal voids appear on
set up 326 prints 303
T solving basic printer print irregularities 307
TCP/IP menu 131 problems 287 print is too dark 309
telecommunication the scanner does not respond 332 print is too light 310
notices 342, 343, 344, 345 troubleshooting, copy printer is printing solid black
The device is operating in safe copier does not respond 320 pages 307
mode. Some print options may be partial document or photo repeating defects appear on
disabled or provide unexpected copies 320 prints 311
results. 285 poor copy quality 321 shadow images appear on
the scanner does not respond 332 poor scanned image quality 329 prints 312
tips scanner unit does not close 331 skewed print 313
card stock 58 troubleshooting, display streaked horizontal lines appear
labels, paper 59 printer display is blank 289 on prints 314
on using envelopes 58 troubleshooting, fax streaked vertical lines 315
transparencies 60 caller ID is not shown 322 toner fog or background shading
tips on using envelopes 58 can receive but not send appears on prints 316
tips on using letterhead 59 faxes 325 toner rubs off 317
toner cartridge can send but not receive toner specks appear on prints 317
ordering 211 faxes 326 transparency print quality is
replacing 221 cannot send or receive a fax 323 poor 318
toner cartridges received fax has poor print uneven print density 318
recycling 201 quality 327 white streaks on a page 318
toner darkness troubleshooting, paper feed troubleshooting, printer options
adjusting 71 message remains after jam is internal option is not
Too many flash options installed cleared 293 detected 289
[58] 285 troubleshooting, print internal print server 290
Too many trays attached [58] 285 envelope seals when printing 295 Internal Solutions Port 290
touch screen error reading flash drive 295 tray problems 291
buttons 18 held jobs do not print 294 USB/parallel interface card 292
transfer module incorrect characters print 296 troubleshooting, scan
replacing 230 incorrect margins on prints 304 cannot scan from a computer 329
transfer roller jammed pages are not partial document or photo
replacing 233 reprinted 292 scans 329
transparencies job prints from wrong tray 296 scan job was not successful 330
copying on 77 job prints on wrong paper 296 scanner unit does not close 331
tips 60 jobs do not print 299 scanning takes too long or freezes
Tray [x] paper size Large jobs do not collate 297 the computer 331
unsupported 286 multiple‑language PDF files do not two‑sided copying 79
print 297
Index 364

U volatility
understanding the home screen statement of 202
buttons and icons 16
uneven print density 318 W
Unformatted flash detected waste toner bottle
[53] 286 ordering 211
Universal paper size replacing 223
setting 51 Waste toner bottle nearly full
Universal Setup menu 126 [82.xy] 286
unlinking trays 56, 57 Weblink server not set up. Contact
Unsupported option in slot [x] system administrator. 286
[55] 286 Wireless menu 133
Unsupported USB hub, please wireless network
remove 273 configuration information 46
USB port 44 wireless network setup
USB/parallel interface card using the Embedded Web
troubleshooting 292 Server 49
using Forms and Favorites 70 wireless setup wizard
using Hibernate mode 199 using 47
using recycled paper 198
using the address book X
e‑mailing 86 XPS menu 191
using the ADF
copying 76
using the automatic document
feeder (ADF) 14
using the scanner glass 14
copying 76
using the touch‑screen buttons 18
Utilities menu 190

V
verify print jobs 73
printing from a Macintosh
computer 73
printing from Windows 73
vertical voids appear 318
viewing
reports 239
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 239
voice mail
setting up 91
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
fax setup 96
voids appear 318
VoIP adapter 96
volatile memory 202
erasing 203